Issuu on Google+

Flush-mounted inserts

UNIVERSAL FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS

ONE INSERT – lets you be creative The new QuickFlex inserts are every inch the pioneer: with new and improved functionality, they make installation a snap – connecting, aligning, fastening, checking and expanding the inserts is now quicker, safer and more convenient. This is achieved by specially-moulded wiring compartments, optimised cable routing, practical plug-in terminals for fastening, and the low mounting depth, which permits simple wiring. Components with several decouplings and rounded edges also ensure optimum safety during installation. An added advantage: QuickFlex modules can be retrofitted and expanded with QuickFix socket-outlets and bases such as the LED lighting module, which can be used to create lighting accents.

Convenient front-side testing

CONNECTING made easy • Low mounting depth for greater freedom of movement when wiring • Plug-in terminals with funnel-shaped cable entry for easy and quick wiring • Ergonomic: connections are angled at 35°, making installation considerably easier • Circuit diagram on rear for a safe overview of the wiring • Easy-to-operate, easy-access release levers

• Clear and easily recognisable connection markings • Test contacts allow convenient testing and measuring from front – without the need for disassembly of switches

Fast and safe alignment

Super-fast fastening Intelligent additional functions can be retrofitted without the need for disassembly work • The bases are pre-equipped for LED lighting modules: simply plug in and you're done • The red or multicoloured LED lighting module can be used as a control light or as an orientation light

• Just three short turns of the quickfastening screws and the base will sit securely in the box • 100% safety due to fully-insulated retaining ring • 100% flush claws for easy and safe installation in cavity wall boxes • Easy claw-return makes changes to mounting and realignments easier than ever

©2010

|Flush-mounted inserts

www.merten.de

• The 1 mm stainless-steel retaining ring is “indestructible” and resistant to bending even on uneven walls • Its rounded edges make installation even safer • The zinc-plated surface makes the alignment markings and identification markings even more visible • The acclaimed retaining ring interlocking system enables quick and easy alignment and installation of multiple combinations

301


Flush-mounted inserts

Flush-mounted Inserts | Conversion made easy QuickFlex, Merten's new switch and socket-outlet base, enables quick and simple installation, and can be combined with other functional modules. The electrician can install the unit in only three steps, greatly decreasing installation time. Additional functionality is provided by the QuickFlex modules; for example, the ambient light for the socket-outlet base or the orientation light for the switch base can all be adjusted. QuickFlex combined innovative technology with high-quality processing

Push-button| Previous flush-mounted inserts

and materials, and is easy and economical to use – key factors for both electricians and end-users alike. The following two tables list the old flush-mounted inserts and the equivalent new QuickFlex sockets. The new Merten article numbering system makes converting to QuickFlex sockets even easier. The numbering system makes it easy and convenient to order Merten products. The article numbers are comprised of four logical number blocks: functions, variants, design, and colour code. In the future,

switch | NEW: QuickFlex flush-mounted inserts

Art. no.

Description

Description

Art. no.

Version

311600

Rocker switch inserts, two-way

One-/two-way switch insert, 1-pole

MEG5136-0000

10 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG5136-0000

16 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3516-0000

16 AX, screw/lift terminals

MEG3115-0000

10 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3615-0000

16 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3515-0000

16 AX, screw/lift terminals

MEG3117-0000

10 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3617-0000

16 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3517-0000

16 AX, screw/lift terminals

MEG3126-0000

10 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3626-0000

16 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3526-0000

16 AX, screw/lift terminals

311500

311700

311601

Rocker switch inserts, two-circuit Rocker switch inserts, intermediate Rocker switch inserts, double two-way

Two-circuit switch insert, 1-pole

Intermediate switch insert, 1-pole

Double two-way switch insert, 1-pole

325500

Two-circuit control switch insert with N terminal, two-circuit

Two-circuit switch insert with N-terminal, 1-pole

MEG3125-0000

10AX, plug-in terminals

311200

Rocker switch insert, one-way, 2-pole

On/off-switch insert, 2-pole

MEG3112-0000

10 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3612-0000

16 AX, plug-in terminals

Two-way switch/two-way push-button insert

MEG3128-0000

10 AX + 10 A, plug-in terminals

One-/two-way control switch insert, 1-pole

MEG3106-0000

10 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3606-0000

16 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3506-0000

16 AX, screw/lift terminals

MEG3136-0000

10 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3636-0000

16 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3536-0000

16 AX, screw/lift terminals

MEG3102-0000

10 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3602-0000

16 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3502-0000

16 AX, screw/lift terminals

MEG3105-0000

10 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3605-0000

16 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3135-0000

10 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3635-0000

16 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3535-0000

16 AX, screw/lift terminals

MEG3137-0000

10 AX, plug-in terminals

MEG3637-0000

16 AX, plug-in terminals

325600

Rocker control switch insert, two-way

One-/two-way switch insert, orientation light, 1-pole 325200

Rocker control switch insert, one-way, 2-pole

One-way control switch insert, 2-pole

Two-circuit control switch insert, 1-pole

www.merten.de

Two-circuit switch insert with orientation light, 1-pole

302

each number block will be preceded by the abbreviation MEG.

Intermediate switch insert with orientation light, 1-pole

Flush-mounted inserts | Š2010


Flush-mounted inserts

Conversion made easy | Flush-mounted Inserts Push-button | NEW: QuickFlex flush-mounted inserts

Art. no.

Description

Description

Art. no.

Version

315000

Rocker button insert, make contact, 1-pole

Push-button insert, make contact, 1-pole

MEG3150-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals

MEG3050-0000

10 A, screw/lift terminals

315900

315901

315902

315903

315800

Push-button insert with orientation light, MEG3160-0000 make contact, 1-pole MEG3560-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals 16 A, screw/lift terminals

Rocker button insert, make contact, 1-pole, with separate signalling contact Rocker button insert, two-way, 1-pole

Push-button insert, with separate signalling contact, make contact, 1-pole

MEG3154-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals

Push-button insert with N-terminal, two-way, 1-pole

MEG3156-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals

MEG3056-0000

10 A, screw/lift terminals

Double rocker button insert, 2 make contacts

Double push-button insert, 2 make contacts, 1-pole

MEG3155-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals

MEG3055-0000

10 A, screw/lift terminals

Double push-button insert, 2 two-way, 1-pole

MEG3159-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals

MEG3059-0000

10 A, screw/lift terminals

Double push-button insert, 1 break contact, 1-pole + 1 make contact, 1-pole

MEG3153-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals

Push-button insert with N-terminal, make contact, 1-pole

MEG3151-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals

Double push-button insert, with orientation light, 2 make contacts, 1-pole

MEG3165-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals

Push-button insert for keycard, with separate signalling contact, make contact, 1-pole

MEG3754-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals

Push-button insert for keycard, with separate signalling contact and orientation light, make contact, 1-pole

MEG3760-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals

Double rocker button insert, 1 make contact/ 1 break contact

Rocker button insert for hotel keycard holder, two-way

311501

Roller shutter rocker switch insert, 1-pole

Two-circuit switch insert, 1-pole

MEG3715-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals

311502

Roller shutter rocker switch insert with additional contact

Two-circuit switch insert with additional contact, 1-pole

MEG3714-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals

315500

Roller shutter rocker button insert, 1-pole

Roller shutter push-button insert, 1-pole

MEG3755-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals

Pull-cord switch insert, with separate signalling contact, make contact, 1-pole

MEG3184-0000

10 A, plug-in terminals

Pull-cord two-way switch insert, 1-pole

MEG3186-0000

10 AX, plug-in terminals

Pull-cord on/off switch insert, 2-pole

MEG3182-0000

10 AX, plug-in terminals

LED lighting module for switches/ push-button switches

MEG3901-0006

100-230 V, red

LED lighting module for switches/ push-button switches

MEG3921-0000

8-32 V, multicolour

MEG3901-0000

100-230 V, multicolour

LED lighting module for double switches/push-button switches as control lamp

MEG3902-0000

100-230 V, multicolour

MEG3922-0000

8-32 V, multicolour

LED lighting module for double switches/push-button switches to aid with orientation

MEG3942-0000

100-230 V, multicolour

4367xx 4366xx

396502

396176

396276

Pull-cord two-way switch insert, System M

Neon lamp attachment with integrated lamp

Light attachment for two-circuit control switch

Light attachment for two-circuit switch

Š2010

|Flush-mounted inserts

www.merten.de

Push-button| Previous flush-mounted inserts

303


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

A

Rocker switch insert 20 A

Flush-mounted insertsFlush-mounted inserts/accessoriesFlush-mounted insertsUniversal insertsFlush-mounted inserts/accessoriesA

• Surface-mounted visible installation possible in connection with surface-mounted housing. • Switch inserts with connecting terminals in accordance with VDE 0632. • Can be illuminated in accordance with German workplace regulations. –

Technical Information: Flush-mounted inserts

20 A, AC 250 V With screw terminals.

Version

Art. no.

one-way, 2-pole

311201

PU PG

Info

10/50 1

Rocker control switch insert 10 A Switch and push-button inserts System M switch rockers → 38, System Design switch rockers → 153, OCTOCOLOR switch rockers → 212, AQUADESIGN switch rockers → 237, System Basis switch rockers → 277 – Technical Information: Circuit diagrams for installation of switches and push-buttons

10 AX, AC 250 V Can also be used as a 1-pole, one-way control switch. With plug-in terminals.

˜

Rocker switch insert 10 A 10 AX, AC 250 V With plug-in terminals.

Contents: With neon lamp.

Version

Art. no.

one-way, 2-pole two-way

325200 325600

PU PG 10/50 1 10/100 1

Info disc. disc.

Rocker double control switch insert 10 A with N terminal Version

Art. no.

PU PG

two-way intermediate one-way, 2-pole

311600 311700 311200

10/100 1.8 10/50 1 10/50 1

10 AX, AC 250 V With plug-in terminals.

Info disc. disc. disc.

Version

Art. no.

two-circuit

325500

Rocker double switch insert 10 A

10 A, 250 V AC With plug-in terminals.

Accessories: Light attachment for two-circuit switch, art. no. 396276.

Version

Art. no.

two-circuit

311500

PU PG 10/100 1

Info disc.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

make contact, 1-pole make contact, 1-pole, with separate signalling contact two-way, 1-pole

315000 315900

10/100 1.8 10/50 1

disc. disc.

315901

10/50 1

disc.

Rocker double switch insert 10 A

Version

Art. no. 311601

Info

Rocker double button insert 10 A

10 AX, AC 250 V With screw terminals.

double two-way

Info disc.

Rocker button insert

10 AX, AC 250 V With plug-in terminals.

˜

PU PG 10/50 1

10 A, 250 V AC 2 separate conducting paths. With plug-in terminals. PU PG

10/50 1

Info disc.

Rocker switch insert 16 A

Version

Art. no.

2 make contacts 1 make contact/1 break contact

315902 315903

16 AX, AC 400 V Illuminated. With screw terminals.

PU PG 10/50 1 10/50 1

Info disc. disc.

Rocker button insert for hotel keycard holder 6 A, 230 V AC With plug-in terminals.

www.merten.com

˜

304

Accessories: Light attachment, art. no. 396376.

Version

Art. no.

one-way, 3-pole with screw terminals

311300

PU PG 10/50 1

Info

˜

Accessories: Neon lamp attachment with integrated lamp, art. no. 396502. Plug-in light attachment E 10, art. no. 396576. LED lamp E 10, art. no. 3951... Neon lamp E 10, art. no. 395100.

Version

Art. no.

two-way

315800

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES | Switch and push-button inserts | ©2010

PU PG 10/50 1

Info disc.


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

A

Two-circuit switch insert 1 pole

Rocker switch inserts

With claw and screw fixing.

Features: • Frontal retrofitting of QuickFlex lighting modules with no dismantling of switches. • Front-attachment measurement and test contacts; accessible without dismantling switches. • Quick-fastening screws for securing of claws. • Flush-mounted claws with return springs. • High-gloss galvanised retaining ring insulated to the claw. System M switch rockers → 38, System Design switch rockers → 153, OCTOCOLOR switch rockers → 212, AQUADESIGN switch rockers → 237, System Basis switch rockers → 277 – Technical Information: Circuit diagrams for installation of switches and push-buttons ˜

˜

Accessories: LED lighting module for double switches/push-buttons as orientation light, MEG3942-0000.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

˜

10 AX, 250 V AC 16 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3115-0000 MEG3615-0000

10/60 1 10/60 1

new new

10/60 1

new

screw terminals with lift clamp

˜

16 AX, 250 V AC

One-way switch insert 1 pole

MEG3515-0000

Intermediate switch insert 1 pole

With claw and screw fixing. Circuit diagram:

With claw and screw fixing.

2 1

˜

Accessories: LED lighting module for switches/push-buttons 100-230 V, MEG3901-00... LED lighting module for switches/ push-buttons 8-32 V, MEG3921-00...

Version ˜

L

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3111-0000

˜

Accessories: LED lighting module for switches/push-buttons 100-230 V, MEG3901-00... LED lighting module for switches/ push-buttons 8-32 V, MEG3921-00...

Version ˜

10/60 1

Art. no.

With claw and screw fixing.

˜

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC 16 AX, 250 V AC

Two-way switch insert 1 pole

PU PG

MEG3117-0000 MEG3617-0000

10/60 1 10/60 1

new new

10/60 1

new

screw terminals with lift clamp

16 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3517-0000

Double two-way switch insert 1 pole With claw and screw fixing. Accessories: LED lighting module for switches/push-buttons 100-230 V, MEG3901-00... LED lighting module for switches/ push-buttons 8-32 V, MEG3921-00...

Version ˜

PU PG

Info

MEG3116-0000 MEG3616-0000

10/60 1.8 10/60 1

new new

10/60 1

new

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC 16 AX, 250 V AC ˜

Art. no.

screw terminals with lift clamp

16 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3516-0000

Version ˜

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC 16 AX, 250 V AC ˜

Art. no.

MEG3126-0000 MEG3626-0000

10/60 1 10/60 1

new new

10/60 1

new

screw terminals with lift clamp

16 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3526-0000

www.merten.com

˜

©2010

| Rocker switch inserts | FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

305


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

A

˜

Two-circuit switch insert 1 pole with neutral terminal

Two-way switch insert 1 pole with indicator light

With claw and screw fixing.

With claw and screw fixing.

Accessories: LED lighting module for double switch/push-button as control lamp, MEG3902-0000, MEG3922-0000. LED lighting module for double switches/push-buttons as orientation light, MEG3942-0000.

Version ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3125-0000

10/60 1

new

Contents: With red 230 V lighting module for switch/push-button.

Version ˜

Art. no.

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC 16 AX, 250 V AC ˜

PU PG

MEG3106-0000 MEG3606-0000

10/60 1 10/60 1

new new

10/60 1

new

screw terminals with lift clamp

16 AX, 250 V AC

One-way switch insert 2 pole

MEG3506-0000

Two-way switch insert 1 pole with locator light

With claw and screw fixing.

With claw and screw fixing.

˜

Accessories: LED lighting module for switches/push-buttons 100-230 V, MEG3901-00... LED lighting module for switches/ push-buttons 8-32 V, MEG3921-00...

Version ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC 16 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3112-0000 MEG3612-0000

10/60 1 10/60 1

new new

Contents: With red 230 V lighting module for switch/push-button.

Version ˜

Art. no.

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC 16 AX, 250 V AC ˜

PU PG

MEG3136-0000 MEG3636-0000

10/60 1 10/60 1

new new

10/60 1

new

screw terminals with lift clamp

16 AX, 250 V AC

One-way switch insert 3 pole

MEG3536-0000

One-way switch insert 2 pole with indicator light

Illuminated.

With claw and screw fixing.

˜

Accessories: Light attachment, art. no. 396376.

Version ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Info —

screw terminals

16 AX, 400 V AC

311300

10/50 1

Version ˜

Two-way switch and two-way push button insert The left rocker is designed as a 10 AX, 250 V AC two-way switch and the right rocker is a 10 A, 250 V AC push-button. With claw and screw fixing.

˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals 10/60 1

new

www.merten.com

10 AX/10 A, 250 V AC MEG3128-0000

306

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES | Rocker switch inserts | ©2010

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC 16 AX, 250 V AC

Version ˜

Contents: With red 230 V lighting module for switch/push-button.

MEG3102-0000 MEG3602-0000

10/60 1 10/60 1

new new

10/60 1

new

screw terminals with lift clamp

16 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3502-0000


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES Two-circuit switch insert 1 pole with indicator light

One-way switch insert 1 pole with indicator light

With claw and screw fixing.

With claw and screw fixing. Circuit diagram:

A

2 1

Contents: With red 230 V LED lighting module for double switch/ push-button as indicator light.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

Contents: With red 230 V lighting module for switch/push-button.

Version

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC 16 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3105-0000 MEG3605-0000

10/60 1 10/60 1

new new

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

˜ ˜

L

10 AX, 250 V AC 16 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3101-0000 MEG3601-0000

10/60 1 10/60 1

screw terminals with lift clamp

˜

16 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3501-0000

10/60 1

One-way switch insert 1 pole with separate signalling contact With claw and screw fixing. Circuit diagram:

Rocker button inserts

2 1

˜

Features: • Frontal retrofitting of QuickFlex lighting modules with no dismantling of switches. • Front-attachment measurement and test contacts; accessible without dismantling switches. • Quick-fastening screws for securing of claws. • Flush-mounted claws with return springs. • High-gloss galvanised retainer ring insulated to the claw.

Accessories: LED lighting module for switches/push-buttons 100-230 V, MEG3901-00... LED lighting module for switches/ push-buttons 8-32 V, MEG3921-00...

Version ˜

L

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3114-0000

10/60 1

Two-circuit switch insert 1 pole with locator light With claw and screw fixing.

System M switch rockers → 38, System Design switch rockers → 153, OCTOCOLOR switch rockers → 212, AQUADESIGN switch rockers → 237, System Basis switch rockers → 277 – Technical Information: Circuit diagrams for installation of switches and push-buttons ˜

Push-button insert make contact 1 pole —

Version ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC 16 AX, 250 V AC ˜

With claw and screw fixing.

Contents: With red 230 V LED lighting module for double switch/ key as locator light

MEG3135-0000 MEG3635-0000

10/60 1 10/60 1

new new

10/60 1

new

˜

screw terminals with lift clamp

16 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3535-0000

Accessories: LED lighting module for switches/push-buttons 100-230 V, MEG3901-00... LED lighting module for switches/ push-buttons 8-32 V, MEG3921-00...

Version ˜

With claw and screw fixing.

˜

Info

MEG3150-0000

10/60 1.8

new

10/60 1

new

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC

screw terminals with lift clamp

10 A, 250 V AC

MEG3050-0000

Contents: With red 230 V lighting module for switch/push-button.

Version ˜

PU PG

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC 16 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3137-0000 MEG3637-0000

10/60 1 10/60 1

www.merten.com

Intermediate switch insert 1 pole with locator light

Art. no.

new new

©2010

| Rocker button inserts | FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

307


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

A

Push-button insert make contact 1 pole with separate signalling contact

Double push-button insert twoway 1 pole With claw and screw fixing.

With claw and screw fixing.

˜

Accessories: LED lighting module for switches/push-buttons 100-230 V, MEG3901-00... LED lighting module for switches/ push-buttons 8-32 V, MEG3921-00...

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

Version ˜

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC

MEG3159-0000

10/60 1

Info

10/60 1

new

10/60 1

new

screw terminals with lift clamp

10 A, 250 V AC MEG3154-0000

PU PG

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC ˜

˜

Art. no.

MEG3059-0000

new

Double push-button insert 1 make contact 1 pole + 1 break contact 1 pole

Push-button insert two-way 1 pole With claw and screw fixing.

With claw and screw fixing.

˜

Accessories: LED lighting module for switches/push-buttons 100-230 V, MEG3901-00... LED lighting module for switches/ push-buttons 8-32 V, MEG3921-00...

Version ˜

Art. no.

˜

MEG3156-0000

MEG3056-0000

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals MEG3153-0000

10/60 1

new

Info

10/60 1

new

Two-way switch and two-way push button insert

10/60 1

new

The left rocker is designed as a 10 AX, 250 V AC two-way switch and the right rocker is a 10 A, 250 V AC push-button. With claw and screw fixing.

screw terminals with lift clamp

10 A, 250 V AC

Art. no.

10 A, 250 V AC

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC ˜

PU PG

Version

Double push-button insert make contact 1 pole With claw and screw fixing. Version ˜

Art. no.

Accessories: LED lighting module for double switches/push-buttons as orientation light, MEG3942-0000.

Version ˜

PU PG

MEG3155-0000

Info

10/60 1

new

10/60 1

new

new

With claw and screw fixing.

screw terminals with lift clamp

10 A, 250 V AC

MEG3055-0000

˜

Accessories: LED lighting module for switches/push-buttons 100-230 V, MEG3901-00... LED lighting module for switches/ push-buttons 8-32 V, MEG3921-00...

Version ˜

www.merten.com

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES | Rocker button inserts | ©2010

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC

308

10/60 1

Push-button insert break contact 1 pole with neutral terminal

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC ˜

Art. no.

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX/10 A, 250 V AC MEG3128-0000 ˜

PU PG

MEG3151-0000

10/60 1

new


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES Push-button insert make contact 1 pole with locator light

A

Special switch functions

With claw and screw fixing.

Contents: With red 230 V lighting module for switch/push-button.

Version ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC ˜

Features: • Frontal retrofitting of QuickFlex lighting modules with no dismantling of switches. • Front-attachment measurement and test contacts; accessible without dismantling switches. • Quick-fastening screws for securing of claws. • Flush-mounted claws with return springs. • High-gloss galvanised retainer ring insulated to the claw.

MEG3160-0000

10/60 1

new

10/60 1

new

˜

screw terminals with lift clamp

16 A, 250 V AC

MEG3560-0000

Time switches (complete items) can be found in the System Basis, System M, System Design or OCTOCOLOR ranges.

Pull-cord two-way switch insert 1 pole

Double push-button insert make contact 1 pole with locator light

With claw and screw fixing.

With claw and screw fixing.

Contents: With red 230 V LED lighting module for double switch/ key as locator light

Version ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Version ˜

Info

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC

MEG3186-0000

10/60 1

new

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC

MEG3165-0000

10/60 1

new

Pull-cord one-way switch insert 2 pole

Push-button insert make contact 1 pole for hotel keycard holder with separate signalling contact

With claw and screw fixing.

With claw and screw fixing.

Version ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Version

Info

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC

˜

MEG3754-0000

10/60 1

Art. no.

Info

plug-in terminals

10 AX, 250 V AC

new

PU PG

MEG3182-0000

10/60 1

new

Pull-cord push-button insert make contact 1 pole with separate signalling contact

Push-button insert make contact 1 pole for hotel keycard holder with separate signalling contact and locator light

With claw and screw fixing.

With claw and screw fixing.

Contents: With red 230 V lighting module for switch/push-button.

Version ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Version

Info

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC

˜

MEG3760-0000

10/60 1

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC

new

Art. no.

MEG3184-0000

10/60 1

new

www.merten.com

©2010

| Special switch functions | FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

309


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

A

Time switch insert

Semi-cylinder lock with key removal in centre position

AC 250 V, 16 A (4 A for motors) Possible deviation of up to + 12 %.

To be completed with: Central plate for time switch insert, 15 min, art. no. System M 5674.., 5390..,5393.., System Basis 5380.., System Design 5383.., OCTOCOLOR 5381... Central plate for time switch insert, 120 min, art. no. System M 5675.., 5392..5394.., System Basis 5382.., System Design 5384.., OCTOCOLOR 5389... – Technical Information

Standardised quality locking cylinder made by ABUS Pfaffenhain GmbH. On request, can be integrated into new locking system at ABUS Pfaffenhain GmbH. Length: 40 mm.

˜

Version

Art. no.

2-pole, 15 min 2-pole, 120 min

538000 538200

PU PG

Contents: With 3 keys.

Version

Art. no. MEG3985-0003

Version

Art. no. 317400

PU PG

Info

1/40 8

Fan switch insert 10 A, 250 V AC For switching fans at three different speeds.

˜

To be completed with: Central plate for fan switch, art. no. 3171.., 4371...

Version

Art. no. 317100

PU PG

Info

1/40 1

Universal switch insert for cylinder locks 10 A, 250 V AC For standard semi-cylinder locks of 40 mm in length. No zero position! To be completed with: Central plate for two-way maintained-contact switch, art. no. System M 3195.., 3181.., System Basis 3186.., OCTOCOLOR 3346... – Technical Information — Contents: Without lock. ˜

Art. no. 318601

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

www.merten.com

Version 2-pole

310

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES | Special switch functions | ©2010

new

Contents: With 3 keys.

Version

To be completed with: Central plate for three-step rotary switch, art. no. System M 5672.., 4373..5388.., System Basis 3174.., System Design 3169.., OCTOCOLOR 3173...

Info

Standardised quality locking cylinder made by ABUS Pfaffenhain GmbH. On request, can be integrated into new locking system at ABUS Pfaffenhain GmbH. Length: 40 mm.

Three-step rotary switch insert

˜

PU PG 1/48 8

Semi-cylinder lock with key removal in 3 positions

Info

1/40 8 1/40 8

16 A, AC 250 V For 3-level switching of fans for air conditioning devices, heating systems or extractor hoods.

Art. no. MEG3985-0001

PU PG 1/48 8

Info new


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

A

Universal dimmer insert, 2-gang

Button dimmer

AC 230 V, 50-60 Hz For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads, e.g. incandescent lamps, dimmable wound transformers and electronic transformers. (Phase control or phase alignment). The universal dimmer automatically recognises the connected load. Do not connect any mixed loads. With memory function, can be switched off.

• Memory function: When the light is switched on, it has the last set brightness level. Explanation of symbols: 230 V incandescent lamps 230 V halogen lamps Dimmable, wound transformers

Neutral conductor:not required (2 conductor system) Nominal power/per channel: 50-200 W/VA

Electronic transformers for phase alignment dimmer Electric motors System M touch sensor surfaces → 48, System Design touch sensor surfaces → 159, OCTOCOLOR touch sensor surfaces → 215, AQUADESIGN touch sensor surfaces → 238, System Basis touch sensor surfaces → 280 – Technical Information: Dimmer basics; Dimmer and load types; Lamps/dimmer matrix ˜

To be completed with: Push-button module, 2-gang, art. no. System M 568499, System Design 568199. Rockers for 2-gang pushbutton module, art. no. System M 6192.., 6252.., System Design 6262... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information ˜

Universal super dimmer insert

Version

Art. no.

AC 230 V For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads, e.g. incandescent lamps, dimmable wound transformers or electronic transformers. Phase control or phase alignment The universal dimmer automatically recognises the connected load. Do not connect any mixed loads. With memory function, can be switched off.

2 x 50-200 VA

568099

To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Central plate comfort rotating regulator for Universal super dimmer insert, art. no. System M 5678.., 5677... In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT sensor cover for dimmer inserts art. No. System M 5036.., 5026..., System Design 5046... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information — Note: The insert from version 3A only can be used in conjunction with the CONNECT radio system.

AC 230 V For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. (Phase control) With memory function, can be switched off.

Art. no. 577099

PU PG

To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

60-400 W 60-600 W, halogen 500 W

573399 577299

PU PG

Info

1/60 8 1/60 8

Info

1/50 8

www.merten.com

Version 25-420 VA

Info

Memory super dimmer insert for ohmic load

Neutral conductor: not required (2 conductor system) ˜

PU PG 1/50 8

©2010

| Button dimmer | FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

311


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

A

Memory halogen super dimmer insert for inductive load AC 230 V For dimmable, wound transformers and incandescent lamps (inductive/ohmic load). (Phase control) With memory function, can be switched off.

Contact switch System M touch sensor surfaces → 48, System Design touch sensor surfaces → 159, OCTOCOLOR touch sensor surfaces → 215, AQUADESIGN touch sensor surfaces → 238, System Basis touch sensor surfaces → 280 – Technical Information: Electronic/relay switch ˜

Electronic switch insert To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information

AC 230 V For ohmic load such as incandescent lamps, 230 V halogen lamps.

˜

Version

Art. no.

20-500 VA

573599

PU PG

Info

1/60 8

Memory ET super dimmer insert for capacitive load AC 230 V For electronic transformers (MET and other brands) and incandescent lamps (ohmic load). (Phase alignment) Noise-free, short-circuit-proof, with overload protection, and soft start function to protect the lamps. With memory function, can be switched off. To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With universal relay insert, art. no. 575897, with preset push-button function. – Technical Information

Switching capacity: 25-400 W Neutral conductor: not required (2 conductor system) To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.. or TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information — Note: The electronic switch insert, cannot be used in conjunction with the CONNECT radio system. ˜

Version

Art. no.

25-400 W

575799

20-315 W

577899

PU PG

Info

1/60 8

www.merten.com

Art. no.

312

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES | Contact switch | ©2010

Info

Electronic push-button insert AC 230 V Pulse generator for surge switches or protective circuits. The switching function is determined by the surge switch or protective circuit used.

˜

Version

PU PG 1/50 8

Connected load: 4-100 VA Switching current: 10-500 mA Pulse duration: approx. 40 ms Neutral conductor: not required (2 conductor system) To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

4-100 VA

574697

PU PG 1/60 8

Info


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES Relay universal insert

Electronic switch insert

AC 230 V For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads such as incandescent lamps, energy-saving lamps, LV halogen lighting with conventional transformer, electronic transformers, fluorescent lamps. Neutral conductor required. Functions: • Push-button function: switched on as long as the push-button is touched, max. 1 minute • Switching function: ON/OFF • Time function: 5 s to 1 h

AC 230 V For ohmic load such as incandescent lamps, 230 V halogen lamps.

Connected load: max. 1000 W/VA, 500 VA for LV halogen lamps with conventional transformer, max. 140 µF capacitive load To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

max. 1000 W/VA

575897

PU PG

Switching capacity: 40-300 W Neutral conductor: not required (2 conductor system) To be completed with: ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5755.., 5784.., System Basis 5782.., System Design 5786.., OCTOCOLOR 5753.., AQUADESIGN 5781... ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module with switch, art. no. System M 5728.., 5785.., System Basis 5783.., System Design 5795.., OCTOCOLOR 5756... ARGUS 180/2.20 m flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5688.., 5687... In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT sensor cover for switch inserts art. no. System M 5034.., 5024..., System Design 5044... – Technical Information — Note: A maximum of two electronic switch inserts may be wired in parallel. The insert from version 2A only can be used in conjunction with the CONNECT radio system. ˜

Version

Art. no.

40-300 W

576799

Switching capacity: 0-1000 VA Capacitive load: max. 140 µF Neutral conductor: required (3 conductor system)

Roller shutter/two-circuit insert AC 230 V, 50-60 Hz Neutral conductor required.

Version

Art. no.

1000 VA

576499

PU PG 1/50 8

Info

To be completed with: ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5755.., 5784.., System Basis 5782.., System Design 5786.., OCTOCOLOR 5753.., AQUADESIGN 5781... ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module with switch, art. no. System M 5728.., 5785.., System Basis 5783.., System Design 5795.., OCTOCOLOR 5756... ARGUS 180/2.20 m flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5688.., 5687... In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT sensor cover for switch inserts art. no. System M 5034.., 5024..., System Design 5044... – Technical Information — Note: Replace the relay switch insert, art. no. 576899. ˜

Version

Art. no.

0-1000 VA

576897

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

www.merten.com

To be completed with: Roller shutter control electronics, art. no. 569092, two-circuit control electronics, art. no. 569091. – Technical Information

Info

AC 230 V For ohmic and complex loads such as incandescent lamps, fluorescent lamps, energy-saving lamps, LV halogen lighting etc.

1/50 8

˜

PU PG 1/50 8

Relay switch insert

Info

Switching capacity: AC 230 V, 1000 W/VA for both channels together Capacitive load: AC 230 V, max. 140 µF Power consumption: <1 W Wire range: max. 2x2.5 mm2

A

©2010

| Contact switch | FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

313


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

A

Extension inserts

Rotary dimmers

System M touch sensor surfaces → 48, System Design touch sensor surfaces → 159, OCTOCOLOR touch sensor surfaces → 215, AQUADESIGN touch sensor surfaces → 238, System Basis touch sensor surfaces → 280 – Technical Information: Electronic sensor switch ˜

• Surface-mounted visible installation possible in conjunction with surface-mounted housing. • The following applies for all types of dimmers: If the dimmers cannot dissipate sufficient heat (cavity walls, multiple combinations, surface-mounted combinations and built-in dimmers on DIN rails), the connected loads specified may not be exploited to the maximum.

Extension insert For memory super, halogen super and TELE dimmer, electronic push-button, time switch, relay switch and MET transformers. The extension unit cannot be controlled remotely. Operated as with main unit. To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... – Technical Information

Explanation of symbols: 230 V incandescent lamps 230 V halogen lamps Dimmable, wound transformers Electronic transformers for phase alignment dimmer

˜

Version

Art. no. 573999

PU PG

Info

1/60 8

Extension TELE insert

Electric motors System M rotary dimmer cover → 51, System Design rotary dimmer cover → 162, OCTOCOLOR rotary dimmer cover → 215, System Basis rotary dimmer cover → 281 – Technical Information: Dimmer basics; Dimmer and load types; Lamps/dimmer matrix ˜

For memory super, halogen super and TELE dimmer, electronic push-button, time switch, relay switch and MET transformers. Neutral conductor required. Can be remote controlled. Operated as with main unit. To be completed with: TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... – Technical Information

Universal rotary dimmer insert AC 230 V, 50 Hz For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads, e.g. incandescent lamps, dimmable wound transformers or electronic transformers. Phase control or phase alignment The universal dimmer automatically recognises the connected load. Do not connect any mixed loads. With pressure-operated two-way switch.

˜

Version

Art. no. 573998

PU PG

˜

Info

1/60 8

To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR.

Version 20-420 W/VA 20-600 W/VA

Art. no. MEG5138-0000 MEG5139-0000

PU PG 1/72 8 1/72 8

Info new new

Rotary dimmer insert for ohmic load with pressure-operated on/ off switch AC 230 V, 50 Hz For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. (Phase control). With pressure-operated on/off switch. To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR. – Technical Information ˜

Version

www.merten.com

40-400 W

314

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES | Extension inserts | ©2010

Art. no. MEG5131-0000

PU PG 1/72 8

Info new


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES Dimmer insert for ohmic load

Rotary dimmer insert for inductive load

AC 230 V For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. With pressure-operated one-way switch. (Phase control).

To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts, art. no. System M 5670.., 5699..,5399.., System Basis 5723.., System Design 5720.., OCTOCOLOR 5726... – Technical Information

A

AC 230 V, 50 Hz For dimmable, wound transformers, incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps (inductive/ ohmic load). (Phase control). With pressure-operated two-way switch.

˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

60-400 W

572199

1/50 8.5

Info disc.

To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Rotary dimmer insert for ohmic load with pressure-operated twoway switch

Art. no.

40-600 W/VA

To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR. – Technical Information Art. no. MEG5132-0000

PU PG 1/72 8

Info new

Dimmer insert for ohmic load AC 230 V For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. With pressure-operated two-way switch. (Phase control).

Nominal power: 60-1000 VA Motor load: 60-600 VA Neutral conductor:required To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

60-1000 VA

PU PG 1/72 8 1/72 8.5

Info new

Info disc. disc.

To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 1000 VA, art. no. System Design 5717.., OCTOCOLOR 5715... – Technical Information — Note: Not to be combined with System Basis or System M. ˜

Version

Art. no.

75-900 W/halogen 700 W

572799

PU PG 1/30 8

Info disc.

www.merten.com

Art. no. 572499 572299

PU PG 1/72 8

AC 230 V For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. With pressure-operated two-way switch. (Phase control).

To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts, art. no. System M 5670.., 5699..,5399.., System Basis 5723.., System Design 5720.., OCTOCOLOR 5726... – Technical Information Version

MEG5135-0000

Dimmer insert 900 W for ohmic load

˜

60-400 W 60-600 W, halogen 500 W

Info new

AC 230 V, 50 Hz For dimmable, wound transformers, incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps (inductive/ ohmic load). (Phase control). With pressure-operated on/off switch.

˜

Version

PU PG 1/72 8

Rotary dimmer insert for inductive load

AC 230 V, 50 Hz For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. (Phase control). With pressure-operated two-way switch.

40-400 W

MEG5133-0000

©2010

| Rotary dimmers | FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

315


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

A

LV halogen dimmer insert for inductive load

Electronic potentiometer insert 1-10 V

AC 230 V For dimmable, wound transformers and incandescent lamps (inductive/ohmic load). With pressure-operated two-way switch. (Phase control).

AC 230 V, 50 Hz For fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast or electronic transformer with 1-10 V interface. With pressure-operated on/off switch 1.7 A.

To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts, art. no. System M 5670.., 5699..,5399.., System Basis 5723.., System Design 5720.., OCTOCOLOR 5726... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

20-500 VA

572599

1/72 8.5

To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no. MEG5142-0000

PU PG 1/72 8

Info new

Info disc.

Electronic potentiometer insert 1-10 V

Rotary dimmer insert for capacitive load AC 230 V, 50 Hz For electronic transformers and incandescent lamps (ohmic load). (Phase alignment). With pressure-operated two-way switch. Noise-free, short-circuit-proof, with overload protection, and soft start function to protect the lamps.

For fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast or electronic transformer with 1-10 V interface. With pressure-operated one-way switch 5 A. To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts, art. no. System M 5670.., 5699..,5399.., System Basis 5723.., System Design 5720.., OCTOCOLOR 5726... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no. 572999

To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR. – Technical Information — Note: Suitable for Merten MET transformers.

PU PG 1/50 8

Info disc.

˜

Version 20-315 W 20-630 W

Art. no. MEG5136-0000 MEG5137-0000

PU PG 1/72 8 1/72 8

Dimmer insert for inductive load AC 230 V For dimmable wound transformers, motors, incandescent lamps and fluorescent lamps (inductive/ohmic load). With pressure-operated two-way switch and additional switch contact. (Phase control). In conjunction with the base load of the speed controller, this can be used as a dimmer for argon fluorescent lamps (Ø 38 mm) and as a dimmer in circuits with automatic mains disconnection.

Info new new

ET dimmer insert for capacitive load AC 230 V For electronic transformers (MET and other brands) and incandescent lamps (ohmic load). With pressure-operated two-way switch. (Phase alignment) Noise-free, short-circuit-proof, with overload protection, and soft start function to protect the lamps. To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts, art. no. System M 5670.., 5699..,5399.., System Basis 5723.., System Design 5720.., OCTOCOLOR 5726... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

20-315 W

577199

1/50 8.5

Connected load: 600 W incandescent lamps, 500 W halogen lamps, 500 VA dimmable, wound transformers To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts, art. no. System M 5670.., 5699..,5399.., System Basis 5723.., System Design 5720.., OCTOCOLOR 5726... Accessories: Base load, art. no. 542894. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

25-600 VA

573299

PU PG 1/50 8

Info disc.

Info

Base load

disc.

Consists of 4 x 6 watt resistors. 1 set required per dimmer and per power booster in parallel connection (can be replaced by a 25 watt incandescent lamp). Version

Art. no.

www.merten.com

542894

316

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES | Rotary dimmers | ©2010

PU PG 1/48 8

Info disc.


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES Speed control insert

Roller shutter switch insert with additional contact 1 pole

AC 230 V, 50-60 Hz, max. 2.7 A For stepless speed control of single-phase motors such as induction motors, split-pole motors and universal motors. With separate switching outlet for controlling slats or to switch ohmic loads. With short-circuit protection.

With mechanical reverse lock-out and electrical interlock. With claw and screw fixing. 1

Up

L

Down

To be completed with: Central plate for speed controller, art. no. System M 5676.., 5696.., 5398.., System Basis 5836... — Note: Replaces speed controller insert, art. no. 573699. ˜

Version

Art. no. 583699

PU PG

Info

Note: With an additional contact for switching off the bell function in connection with MEG5209-03../5876.. and 587092, when the "Please do not disturb / Make up room" application is used.

Version

1/50 8

A

˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC

MEG3714-0000

10/60 1

new

Roller shutter rocker switch insert with additional contact

Roller shutter switch inserts

Features: • Frontal retrofitting of QuickFlex lighting modules with no dismantling of switches. • Front-attachment measurement and test contacts; accessible without dismantling switches. • Quick-fastening screws for securing of claws. • Flush-mounted claws with return springs. • High-gloss galvanised retaining ring insulated to the claw.

10 A, 250 V AC With mechanical reverse lock-out and electrical interlock. ˜ —

Accessories: Light attachment for multi switch art. no. 396176. Note: With an additional contact for switching off the bell function in connection with MEG5209-03../5876.. and 587092, when the "Please do not disturb / Make up room" application is used.

Version

Art. no. 311502

System M roller shutter cover → 52, System Design roller shutter cover → 162, OCTOCOLOR roller shutter cover → 215, AQUADESIGN roller shutter cover → 238, System Basis roller shutter cover → 281 – Technical Information: Roller shutter switch and push-button

PU PG 10/50 1

Info disc.

˜

Roller shutter push-button insert 1 pole With mechanical reverse lock-out and electrical interlock. With claw and screw fixing.

Roller shutter switch insert 1 pole

Up

With mechanical reverse lock-out and electrical interlock. With claw and screw fixing. ˜

Up

L

Down

To be completed with: Rocker for roller shutter switches and pushbuttons, art. no. System M 4324.., 4355.., 4344.., System Basis 3155.., System Design 4115.., OCTOCOLOR 3315...

Version Version ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

˜

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC

10/60 1

311501

10/50 1

10/60 1

new

Info

To be completed with: Rocker for roller shutter switches and pushbuttons, art. no. System M 4324.., 4355.., 4344.., System Basis 3155.., System Design 4115.., OCTOCOLOR 3315...

Version

Art. no.

1-pole

315500

PU PG 10/50 1

Info disc.

disc.

www.merten.com

1-pole

PU PG

MEG3755-0000

10 A, 250 V AC With mechanical reverse lock-out and electrical interlock.

˜

To be completed with: Rocker for roller shutter switches and pushbuttons, art. no. System M 4324.., 4355.., 4344.., System Basis 3155.., System Design 4115.., OCTOCOLOR 3315... Art. no.

Info

Roller shutter rocker button insert

10 A, 250 V AC With mechanical reverse lock-out and electrical interlock.

Version

PU PG

new

Roller shutter rocker switch insert

˜

Art. no.

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC MEG3715-0000

L

Down

©2010

| Roller shutter switch inserts | FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

317


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

A

Roller shutter/two-circuit insert

Semi-cylinder lock with key removal in centre position

AC 230 V, 50-60 Hz Neutral conductor required. Switching capacity: AC 230 V, 1000 W/VA for both channels together Capacitive load: AC 230 V, max. 140 µF Power consumption: <1 W Wire range: max. 2x2.5 mm2 To be completed with: Roller shutter control electronics, art. no. 569092, two-circuit control electronics, art. no. 569091. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

1000 VA

576499

PU PG

Standardised quality locking cylinder made by ABUS Pfaffenhain GmbH. On request, can be integrated into new locking system at ABUS Pfaffenhain GmbH. Length: 40 mm. —

Contents: With 3 keys.

Version

Info

To be completed with: Central plate for momentary/maintainedcontact switch insert for roller shutters, art. no. System M 5671.., 5698.., 5387.., System Basis 3172.., System Design 3192.., OCTOCOLOR 3170...

Version

Art. no.

2-pole

317200

PU PG

PU PG

˜

Standard blind control insert AC 230 V, 50 Hz For local control of a blind/roller shutter motor with limit switch. Motor protection through interlocked relay contacts. Without extension input.

To be completed with: Central plate for momentary/maintainedcontact switch inserts for roller shutters, art. no. System M 3194.., 3193.., System Basis 3185.., OCTOCOLOR 3349.., AQUADESIGN 3482... — Contents: Without lock. ˜

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

www.merten.com

Art. no. 318901

318

Nominal voltage: AC 230 V, 50 Hz Neutral conductor:required Switching capacity: max. 1 motor 1000 VA Outputs: 2 make contacts (interlocked) Pulse duration: 2 minutes Connecting terminals: Screw terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2x1.5 mm2

Info

10 A, 250 V AC For standard semi-cylinder locks of 40 mm in length.

Version

new

System M blind control system → 53, System Design blind control system → 163, OCTOCOLOR blind control system → 216, System Basis blind control system → 281

1/50 8

Roller shutter push-button insert for cylinder locks

2-pole

Info

Blind control system

To be completed with: Central plate for momentary/maintainedcontact switch inserts for roller shutters, art. no. System M 3194.., 3193.., System Basis 3185.., OCTOCOLOR 3349.., AQUADESIGN 3482... — Contents: Without lock. Art. no.

PU PG 1/48 8

Info

˜

318501

Art. no. MEG3985-0003

10 A, 250 V AC For standard semi-cylinder locks of 40 mm in length.

Version

new

Contents: With 3 keys.

Version

1/40 1

Momentary/maintained-contact switch insert for roller shutters for cylinder locks

2-pole

Info

Standardised quality locking cylinder made by ABUS Pfaffenhain GmbH. On request, can be integrated into new locking system at ABUS Pfaffenhain GmbH. Length: 40 mm.

Momentary/maintained-contact switch insert for roller shutters

˜

PU PG 1/48 8

Semi-cylinder lock with key removal in 3 positions

1/50 8

10 A, 250 V AC Can be used as push-button with the locking disc provided. Operated via a rotary knob.

Art. no. MEG3985-0001

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES | Blind control system | ©2010

To be completed with: Blind push-buttons and blind time switches for the blind control system. In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT radio roller shutter push-button with sensor connection art. No. System M 5035.., 5025..., System Design 5045... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

1000 VA

580698

PU PG 1/50 8

Info


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES Blind control insert with extension input

Multiple control relay for roller shutters, flush-mounted

AC 230 V, 50 Hz For controlling a blind/roller shutter motor with limit switch. A mechanical roller shutter switch/push-button or an additional blind control insert can be connected via the extension input to implement group/central control. Wind alarm function possible with extension input. Motor protection through interlocked relay contacts.

6 A, AC 250 V Suitable for a size 60 flush-mounted box. Flat 22 mm design. For local control using push-buttons, installation in a deep flush-mounted box. For controlling up to 2 roller shutter motors locally, in groups or centrally. With separation of load and control circuit, as well as forced locking in both directions of movement. Motors are controlled individually using a roller shutter rocker switch and centrally using the blind time switches or blind push-buttons of the Merten blind control system.

Nominal voltage: AC 230 V, 50 Hz Neutral conductor: required Switching capacity: max. 1 motor 1000 VA Outputs: 2 make contacts (interlocked) Reversing time: minimum 500 ms Connecting terminals: Screw terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2x1.5 mm2 To be completed with: Blind push-buttons and blind time switches for the blind control system. In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT radio roller shutter push-button with sensor connection art. No. System M 5035.., 5025..., System Design 5045... Accessories: Wind sensor interface, art. no. 580693. – Technical Information — Note: In combination with the standard blind time switch, art. no. 5809.., 5859.., 5839.., 5819.., the extension input does not work.

Mains voltage: AC 230 V, 50 Hz ±10 % Control voltage: AC 230 V ±10 % Power consumption: 10 mA in relay operation Switching voltage: max. AC 250 V Switching current: max. 6 A Temperature range: 0 -60 °C Terminals: max. 1.5 mm2 Dimensions: 22x49x52 mm (HxWxD) Installation: (deep) flush-mounted box

˜

Version

Art. no.

1000 VA

580699

PU PG

Info

To be completed with: Blanking cover, art. no. System M 3916.., 3918.., 3917.., System Basis 3920.., System Design 3919.., OCTOCOLOR 3926... – Technical Information ˜

Version

1/50 8

A

Art. no. 576398

PU PG

Info

1/100 8

Multiple control relay insert for roller shutters 5 A, AC 250 V Suitable for a size 60 flush-mounted box. With a multiple control relay, it is possible to control 2 motors locally by manual operation or centrally. The multiple control relays can be cascaded. To be completed with: Blanking cover, art. no. System M 3916.., 3918.., 3917.., System Basis 3920.., System Design 3919.., OCTOCOLOR 3926... – Technical Information ˜

Art. no. 576399

PU PG

System M room thermostat cover → 56, System Design room thermostat cover → 166, OCTOCOLOR room thermostat cover → 218, System Basis room thermostat cover → 283 – Technical Information: Heating control ˜

Room temperature control insert with switch

Info

With thermal recirculation. Fourth terminal for night economy.

1/24 8

Heating nominal current: 10 (4) A To be completed with: Central plate for room temperature control unit with switch, art. no. System M 5348.., 5361.., System Basis 5385.., System Design 5397.., OCTOCOLOR 5391... — Contents: Room temperature control insert, protective cover for plaster and screws. ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

AC 230 V AC 24 V

536302 536304

1/50 8.5 1/50 8

Info

www.merten.com

Version

Room temperature control inserts

©2010

| Room temperature control inserts | FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

319


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

A

Room temperature control insert with changeover contact

ET power booster for capacitive load

For electric underfloor heating if the additional heater has to be interlocked, air conditioning (cooling), valve drives (de-energised open or closed). With thermal recirculation.

AC 230 V For power extension of ET dimmers (art. no. 577199) or ET super dimmers (art. no. 577899). The load must be evenly distributed across the ET dimmer and the ET power booster. (Phase alignment).

Heating nominal current: 10 (4) A Cooling nominal current: 5 (2) A To be completed with: Central plate for room temperature control unit with changeover contact, art. no. System M 5347.., 5362.., System Basis 5365.., System Design 5374.., OCTOCOLOR 5364... — Contents: Room temperature control insert, protective cover for plaster and screws. ˜

Version

Art. no.

AC 230 V AC 24 V

536400 536401

PU PG

Info

1/50 8 1/50 8

To be completed with: Blanking cover, art. no. System M 3916.., 3918.., 3917.., System Basis 3920.., System Design 3919.., OCTOCOLOR 3926... Blanking cover AQUADESIGN, art. no. 3483... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

20-315 W

577399

Floor thermostat insert with switch

IR remote control Distance 2010 10 channel IR remote control. For the control of all TELE sensor covers, blind push-buttons with IR receiver, presence detectors with IR receivers and KNX devices with IR receivers.

˜

Version

Art. no.

AC 230 V, 10(4) A

537100

PU PG

Info

1/12 8

Power boosters –

Technical Information: Dimmer basics

Power booster AC 230 V For power extension of memory super dimmers, TELE dimmers, incandescent and fluorescent lamp dimmers. The load must be evenly distributed across dimmers and power boosters. (Phase control). To be completed with: Blanking cover, art. no. System M 3916.., 3918.., 3917.., System Basis 3920.., System Design 3919.., OCTOCOLOR 3926... Blanking cover AQUADESIGN, art. no. 3483... – Technical Information ˜

Art. no. 574099

PU PG

Info

1/60 8

www.merten.com

Version 25-600 VA

320

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES | Power boosters | ©2010

Info

Remote controls

With remote sensor on 4 m incoming lead, extendable with twin-core cable.

To be completed with: Central plate for floor thermostat insert with switch, art. no. System M 5349.., 5358.., System Basis 5371.., System Design 5375.., OCTOCOLOR 5372... — Contents: Room temperature control insert, remote sensor, protective cover for plaster and screws.

PU PG 1/60 8

Battery: 2 microcells (IEC LR 03, AAA) Range: up to 20 m Receiver: TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... Blind push-button with IR receiver and sensor connection, art. no. System M 5880.., 5864.., System Basis 5804..,System Design 5844.., OCTOCOLOR 5824... ARGUS Presence with IR receiver, art. no. 550591, 6309... Push-button, 4-gang plus with IR receiver, art. no. System M 6175.., 6279... — Contents: Without battery. ˜

Version

Art. no.

black

570222

PU PG 1/48 8

Info


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES CONNECT radio universal remote control

Telephone socket-outlet TAE, 3-gang

Radio remote control and IR remote control in a single device. For activating: • Devices of the Merten CONNECT radio system • Merten IR devices • Up to five IR AV devices such as TV, DVD, DVDR, VCR, SAT, cable, AMP and DMR In connection with the CONNECT radio system, several rooms can be set up with radio components using the remote control. Each room can be configured with up to 9 groups with maximum 12 devices and 3 scenes with maximum 12 devices. Radio features: System administrator, transmitter

For the German market. For connecting analogue telephones/ancillary units. With screw terminals. 2×6/6 NF/F: 2 telephones, 1 ancillary unit 3×6 NFN: 1 telephone, 2 ancillary unit

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on, switch off, toggle, dim, raise/lower roller shutters, scene • Programming in EASY CONNECT as a system administrator • Individual programming of CONNECT radio push-buttons • Individual description of rooms and groups • Display of description in LCD display With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally graphic programming of the EASY CONNECT functions Extended functions for IR/AV: • Trigger Philips Ambilight • Supports more than 1,000 manufacturers. Devices are selected from a list or by entering programming codes. • General use of the functions of a device (e.g. volume) in all modes.

˜

To be completed with: Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. System M 2960.., 2979.., System Basis 2928.., System Design 2978.., OCTOCOLOR 2938...

Version

Art. no.

2×6/6 NF/F, white 3x6 NFN, white

465226 465236

Receiver: All receivers of the Merten CONNECT radio system. Note: The device can assume the properties of a system administrator. The remote control must be used as the system administrator in connection with the EASY CONNECT method. In connection with the CONNECT radio configurator, it can be used as required. Contents: With battery.With a codes table for nearly all conventional devices, like TV, VCR, DVD, SAT, AUX, ...

Version

Art. no.

Aluminium/black

506923

PU PG

Info

1/6 8

PU PG

Info

10/50 1 10/50 1

Telephone socket-outlet TDO 3x10 For the Austrian market. For connecting analogue terminal units.

To be completed with: Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. System M 2960.., 2979.., System Basis 2928.., System Design 2978.., OCTOCOLOR 2938... Intermediate ring for combination inserts in line with DIN 49075, art. no. System M 5185.., 5181.., System Basis 5171.., System Design 5160.., OCTOCOLOR 5168... Intermediate ring with hinged lid for combination inserts in line with DIN 49075, art. no. System M 5186.., 5182.., System Basis 5174... — Can only be ordered via Merten in Vienna. ˜

Version

Art. no.

white

465930

Radio range: up to 100 m in free field, up to 30 m indoors IR range: up to 15 m Battery: 3 microcells (IEC LR 03, AAA) Display element: LCD display with 10 characters ˜

A

PU PG

Info

1/1 1

Combination socket-outlet RJ45/ TAE (Cat 3) For connecting a telephone and an analogue or digital terminal unit via the 8-pole RJ45 connector. With screw terminals. To be completed with: Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. System M 2960.., 2979.., System Basis 2928.., System Design 2978.., OCTOCOLOR 2938... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

8(6)-6F+N, white

465707

PU PG

Info

1/60 1

Communications inserts and accessories

Telephone socket-outlet TAE, 1-gang For the German market. For connecting an analogue telephone. With screw terminals. 1×6 F: 1 telephone To be completed with: Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. System M 2960.., 2979.., System Basis 2928.., System Design 2978.., OCTOCOLOR 2938...

Version

Art. no.

1x6 F, white

465206

PU PG

Info

www.merten.com

˜

10/50 1

©2010

| Communications inserts and accessories | FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

321


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

A

Line 21 Combination socket-outlet RJ45/TAE

Line 21 RJ45 insert 8/8 With integrated Line 21 technology. For connecting an analogue telephone/telecommunications system (RJ45, 8-pole) and a digital network device (RJ45, 8-pole) such as PC, HUB, router, Merten switch (art. no. 465711) or IC 1 (art. no. 6950.., 6951...) With 4 screw terminals for the installation line and 2 for analogue telephony.

With integrated Line 21 technology. For connecting an analogue telephone/telecommunications system (TAE) and a digital network device (RJ45, 8-pole) such as PC, HUB, router, Merten switch (art. no. 465711) or IC 1 (art. no. 6950.., 6951...) With 4 screw terminals for the installation line and 2 for the connection of additional telephone socket-outlets. Cable length: max. 50 m Transmission rate: max. 100 Mbit/s To be completed with: Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. System M 2960.., 2979.., System Basis 2928.., System Design 2978.., OCTOCOLOR 2938... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

8(6)-6F+N

465709

PU PG

Cable length: max. 50 m Transmission rate: max. 100 Mbit/s To be completed with: Central plate for RJ45 insert, 2-gang, art. no. System M 2961.., 2980.., System Basis 2927.., System Design 2926.., or OCTOCOLOR 2920... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no. 465708

PU PG

Info

1/60 1

Info

1/60 1

RJ45 insert 2x8 For connecting analogue or digital terminal units via two 8-pole RJ45 connectors connected in parallel with bus-type cabling. With screw terminals.

RJ45 insert 8 For connecting analogue or digital terminals using an 8-pole RJ45 socket. With screw terminals.

To be completed with: Central plate for RJ45 insert, 2-gang, art. no. System M 2961.., 2980.., System Basis 2927.., System Design 2926.., or OCTOCOLOR 2920... – Technical Information ˜

˜

To be completed with: Central plate for RJ45 insert, 1-gang, art. no. System M 2962.., 2983.., System Basis 2917.., System Design 2918...

Version

Art. no. 465720

PU PG

Info

Version

Art. no.

white

465702

RJ45 insert 8/8 Cat 5e For connecting analogue or digital terminal units via two 8-pole RJ45 connectors. Connection via LSA terminals.

For connecting analogue or digital terminals using an 8-pole RJ45 socket. Connection via LSA terminals. ˜

To be completed with: Central plate for RJ45 insert, 1-gang, art. no. System M 2962.., 2983.., System Basis 2917.., System Design 2918...

Version

Art. no. 465721

PU PG

Info

To be completed with: Central plate for RJ45 insert, 2-gang, art. no. System M 2961.., 2980.., System Basis 2927.., System Design 2926.., or OCTOCOLOR 2920...

Version

Art. no.

white

465703

For connecting analogue or digital terminal units via two 8-pole RJ45 connectors. Connection via LSA terminals.

˜

To be completed with: Central plate for RJ45 insert, 2-gang, art. no. System M 2961.., 2980.., System Basis 2927.., System Design 2926.., or OCTOCOLOR 2920... – Technical Information ˜

PU PG

To be completed with: Central plate for RJ45 insert, 2-gang, art. no. System M 2961.., 2980.., System Basis 2927.., System Design 2926.., or OCTOCOLOR 2920...

Version

Art. no.

white

465706

Info

10/40 1

www.merten.com

Art. no. 465701

322

Info

RJ45 insert 8/8 Cat 6

For connecting analogue or digital terminal units via two 8-pole RJ45 connectors. With screw terminals.

Version

PU PG 1/50 1

1/50 1

RJ45 insert 8/8

white

Info

10/50 1

RJ45 insert 8 Cat 5e

˜

PU PG 10/40 1

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES | Communications inserts and accessories | ©2010

PU PG 1/50 1

Info


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES Telephone connector VDo 4

Modular jack connector, Cat 3

For central plate with cable outlet for telephone connector VDo 4.

WE Western type. In line with US FCC 86, Cat 3. Connection with IDC clamping method.

A

Pin configuration Telecom/ISDN modular jack/8pole: 1a/4, 1b/5, 2a/3, 2b/6. ˜

To be completed with: Central plate with cable outlet for telephone connector VDo, art. no. System M 2968.., 2955.., System Basis 3925.., OCTOCOLOR 3927...

Version

Art. no.

4-pole, white

465304

PU PG

˜

Info

10/40 1

Telephone socket-outlet ADo 4 For connecting analogue terminal units.

To be completed with: Supporting plate for modular jack connector, art. no. 461590. Insert for modular jack connector, art. no. System M 464398, System Basis 461398, System Design 464398, OCTOCOLOR 463398. Central plate for modular jack connector, art. no. System M 2901.., 2957.., System Basis 2929...

Version

Art. no.

6-pole RJ 11/ Cat. 3, black 8-pole RJ 45/ Cat. 3, black

465516

5/250 1

PU PG

465518

5/250 1

Info

Modular jack connector, Cat 5 ˜

To be completed with: Central plate for telephone socket-outlet ADo, art. no. System Basis 2930.., OCTOCOLOR 2937... Accessories: Telephone socket-outlet ADo S 4, art. no. 465404.

Version

Art. no.

4-pole, white

465104

PU PG

WE Western type. In line with US FCC 86, Cat 5. Connection via LSA terminals. ˜

Info

10/40 1

Telephone socket-outlet ADo 8 Codeable For connecting analogue terminal units.

To be completed with: Supporting plate for modular jack connector, art. no. 461593. Insert for modular jack connector, art. no. System M 464399, System Basis 461399, System Design 464399, OCTOCOLOR 463399.

Version

Art. no.

8-pole RJ 45/ Cat. 5, black

465595

PU PG

Info

5/120 1

D-type socket connector, 9-pole Solder connection max. 0.6 mm2. To be completed with: Central plate for telephone socket-outlet ADo, art. no. System Basis 2930.., OCTOCOLOR 2937... Accessories: Telephone socket-outlet ADo S 8, art. no. 465408. — Contents: A setting knob for coding is included in every pack of 10. ˜

Art. no. 465108

PU PG

Info

10/40 1

Telephone plug ADo S 4

Version

Art. no.

9-pole

465009

For telephone socket-outlet ADo. ˜

Version

Art. no. 465404

PU PG

Info

5/150 1

Telephone plug ADo S 8 For telephone socket-outlet ADo. ˜

Solder connection max. 0.6 mm2. To be completed with: Central plate for D-type subminiature connector, 15-pole, art. no. System M 4677.., ,4682.., System Basis 4602... Insert for D-type subminiature connector, 15-pole, art. no. System M 464392, System Basis 461392, System Design 464392, OCTOCOLOR 463392. — Contents: With locking pin for M3 screw. ˜

Version

Art. no.

15-pole

465015

To be completed with: Telephone socket-outlet ADo 8, art. no. 465108.

Version

Art. no.

8-pole, white

465408

PU PG

Info

D-type socket connector, 15-pole

To be completed with: Telephone socket-outlet ADo 4, art. no. 465104.

4-pole, white

PU PG 5/500 1

PU PG

Info

5/500 1

D-type socket connector, 25-pole Solder connection max. 0.6 mm2.

Info

To be completed with: Central plate for D-type subminiature connector, 25-pole, art. no. System M 4678.., 4683.., System Basis 4603... Insert for D-type subminiature connector, 25-pole, art. no. System M 464393, System Basis 461393, System Design 464393, OCTOCOLOR 463393. — Contents: With locking pin for M3 screw.

5/250 1

˜

©2010

Version

Art. no.

25-pole

465025

PU PG

Info

5/500 1

| Communications inserts and accessories | FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

www.merten.com

Version 8-pole, white

To be completed with: Central plate for D-type subminiature connector, 9-pole, art. no. System M 4676.., 4681.., System Basis 4601... Insert for D-type subminiature connector, 9-pole, art. no. System M 464391, System Basis 461391, System Design 464391, OCTOCOLOR 463391. — Contents: With locking pin for M3 screw. ˜

323


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

A

BNC connector Ø 12.5 mm

TV/audio

Crimp connection up to Ø 6 mm.

˜

Broadband cable/satellite through-way box, 2-gang DIN EN 50083-1/A1, DIN EN 80083-2/A1 Broadband directional coupler box for loopthrough systems in broadband cable, communal aerial and satellite distribution systems. Suitable for flush-mounted boxes of Ø 55-65 mm. With claw and screw fixing.

To be completed with: Central plate for BNC/TNC socket, art. no. System M 4691.., 4685.., 4686.., System Basis 4605... Insert for BNC/TNC sockets, art. no. System M 464395, System Basis 461395, System Design 464395, OCTOCOLOR 463395.

Version

Art. no. 465010

PU PG

Info

5/500 1

Reichle & De-Massari connection module, unshielded

˜

To be completed with: Central plate for antenna socket-outlet, art. no. System M 2967.., 2975.., System Basis 2948.., System Design 2941.., OCTOCOLOR 2943...

Version

Connection with ICD clamping method (no equipment necessary). ˜

Version

Art. no. 465580 465582

PU PG

Info

Reichle & De-Massari connection module, shielded

˜

To be completed with: Insert for Reichle & De-Massari, art. no. 464384. Accessories: Reichle & De-Massari splash flange, art. no. 465591. Reichle & De-Massari splash sleeve, art. no. 465590.

Version

Art. no.

Cat 5e, 1xRJ45/s Cat 6, 1xRJ45/s

465581 465583

PU PG

˜

To be completed with: Central plate for antenna socket-outlet, art. no. System M 2967.., 2975.., System Basis 2948.., System Design 2941.., OCTOCOLOR 2943...

Version

DIN EN 50083-1/A1, DIN EN 80083-2/A1 Single satellite socket-outlet, 3-gang. For individual branch-circuit and star-type distribution systems in communal aerial and satellite distribution systems. With DC transmission via the satellite connection. Suitable for flushmounted boxes of Ø 55-65 mm. With claw and screw fixing. DC transmission: max. 24 V/320 mA Signal: 22 kHz and DiSEqC

To be completed with: Insert for Reichle & De-Massari, art. no. 464384. Reichle & De-Massari splash sleeve, art. no. 465590. — Contents: 1 PU = 10 pieces. Art. no.

PU PG

Info

1/60 1

Reichle & De-Massari splash sleeve The splash sleeve is pulled over the connecting cable. In conjunction with the splash flange, protection type IP 44 is also achieved with plug-in connecting cable. To be completed with: Reichle & De-Massari splash flange, art. no. 465591. — Note: Splash installation tool (three-prong pliers) can be ordered directly from Reichle & De-Massari. www.merten.com

˜

324

Version

Art. no.

transparent

465590

PU PG

Info

Satellite antenna socket-outlet, 3-gang

˜

465591

PU PG 1/54 1

Info

2/100 1 2/100 1

In the AQUADESIGN switch range, protection type IP 44 is achieved for all Reichle & De Massari modules with the splash flange.

Version

Art. no. 466099

Reichle & De-Massari splash flange

blue

Info

DIN EN 50083-1/A1, DIN EN 80083-2/A1 Broadband directional coupler box for branch-circuit and star-type distribution systems in broadband cable, communal aerial and satellite distribution systems. With DC transmission via the TV connection. Suitable for flush-mounted boxes of Ø 55-65 mm. With claw and screw fixing. DC transmission: max. 24 V/400 mA Signal: 22 kHz and DiSEqC

2/100 1 2/100 1

Connection with ICD clamping method (no equipment necessary).

PU PG 1/54 1

Broadband cable/satellite antenna branch-circuit box, 2-gang

To be completed with: Insert for Reichle & De-Massari, art. no. 464384. Accessories: Reichle & De-Massari splash flange, art. no. 465591. Reichle & De-Massari splash sleeve, art. no. 465590.

Cat 5e, 1xRJ45/u Cat 6, 1xRJ45/u

Art. no. 466098

Info

10/600 1

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES | TV/audio | ©2010

˜

To be completed with: Central plate for antenna socket-outlet, art. no. System M 2967.., 2975.., System Basis 2948.., System Design 2941.., OCTOCOLOR 2943...

Version

Art. no. 466097

PU PG 1/54 1

Info


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES Loudspeaker connection insert, 1-gang

LED lighting module for double switches/push-buttons as orientation light

The poles are labelled in different colours. Conductor cross-section up to max. 10 mm2. With quick plug-in terminals. With screw terminals on the back. ˜

Power consumption 2x0.65 mA For all two-circuit switch/push-button inserts or double switch/push-button inserts from QuickFlex. The colours red, blue and green can each be set on the RGB LEDs via three switches. Combinations of colours are also possible. For use as orientation light. The module can be replaced from the front without any dismantling of switches.

To be completed with: Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. System M 2960.., 2979.., System Basis 2928.., System Design 2978.., OCTOCOLOR 2938...

Version

Art. no.

polar white anthracite

466919 466914

PU PG

Info

10/50 1 10/50 1 —

Loudspeaker connection insert, 2-gang

Version

Version

Art. no. 467019 467014

PU PG

Info

Accessories for universal inserts —

Power consumption 0.65 mA For all 1 and 2-pole switch inserts from QuickFlex. Red LED. For use as control light or orientation light. The module can be replaced from the front without any dismantling of switches.

Version

Art. no. MEG3901-0006

PU PG 1/150 1

Version

Info —

Power consumption 0.65 mA For all 1 and 2-pole switch inserts from QuickFlex. The colours red, blue and green can be set on the RGB LEDs via three switches. Combinations of colours are also possible. For use as control light or orientation light. The module can be replaced from the front without any dismantling of switches.

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

1/150 1

new

1/150 1

new

PU PG

Info

1/150 1

new

1/150 1

new

Contents: With neon lamp.

Version

Art. no.

grey

396502 10/1000 1

PU PG

Info

Plug-in light attachment E 10 For all 1- and 2-pole switch inserts. For monitoring or lighting. Caution! For low voltage variants (e.g. 8 V) we recommend a display lamp, 24-30 V, tubular, E 10, up to 25 mm in length. To be completed with: Neon lamp E 10, art. no. 395100. LED lamp E 10, art. no. 3951... — Contents: Without neon lamp. ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

396576 10/1000 1

www.merten.com

Version

100-230 V, multicol- MEG3901-0000 oured 8-32 V, multicoloured MEG3921-0000

Art. no.

100-230 V, multicol- MEG3902-0000 oured 8-32 V, multicoloured MEG3922-0000

AC 230 V, 0.65 mA For all 1- and 2-pole switch inserts. For monitoring or lighting.

new

Contents: With RGB LED.

new

Neon lamp attachment with integrated lamp

LED lighting module for switches/ push-buttons

Info

Contents: With two RGB LEDs.

Contents: With LED.

100-230 V, red

PU PG 1/150 1

Power consumption 2x0.65 mA For all two-circuit switch/push-button inserts or double switch/push-button inserts from QuickFlex. The colours red, blue and green can each be set on the RGB LEDs via three switches. Combinations of colours are also possible. For use as control lamp. The module can be replaced from the front without any dismantling of switches.

10/50 1 10/50 1

LED lighting module for switches/ push-buttons

Art. no. MEG3942-0000

LED lighting module for double switch/push-button as control lamp

To be completed with: Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. System M 2960.., 2979.., System Basis 2928.., System Design 2978.., OCTOCOLOR 2938...

polar white anthracite

Contents: With two RGB LEDs.

100-230 V, multicoloured

The poles are labelled in different colours. Conductor cross-section up to max. 10 mm2. With quick plug-in terminals. With screw terminals on the back. ˜

A

©2010

| Accessories for universal inserts | FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

325


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

A

LED lamp

Light attachment for 3-pole switch

AC/DC 230 V, AC/DC 24 V Suitable for plug-in light attachment E 10 or light signal E 10 insert. To be completed with: Plug-in light attachment E 10, art. no. 396576. Light signal E 10 insert, art. no. 319016. — Note: Current consumption approx. 20 mA

AC 400 V, 1.25 mA For 3-pole switch. Contacts the outside terminals (400 V).

˜

Version

Art. no.

AC 230 V, red AC 230 V, yellow AC 230 V, green AC 230 V, blue AC 230 V, white AC 24 V, red AC 24 V, yellow AC 24 V, green AC 24 V, blue AC 24 V, white

395120 395121 395122 395123 395124 395131 395132 395133 395134 395135

PU PG 20/240 20/240 20/240 20/240 20/240 20/240 20/240 20/240 20/240 20/240

Info

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

To be completed with: Rocker switch insert, art. no. 311300. Rocker switch, art. no. 340339. Rocker control switch, art. no. 372375. — Contents: With neon lamp. ˜

Version

Art. no.

AC 400 V, 1.25 mA

396376

PU PG

Info

5/1020 1

Light signal E 10 insert AC 250 V, max. 3 W With E 10 holder and red hood

Neon lamp E 10 AC 230 V, 0.65 mA Low current consumption (approx. 0.65 mA) and low starting voltage (max. 120 V) mean it is particularly suitable for stairwell and fluorescent lamp circuits. ˜

To be completed with: Plug-in light attachment E 10, art. no. 396576.

Version

Art. no.

AC 230 V, 0.65 mA

395100

PU PG

Info

20/ 1 4080

To be completed with: Central plate for light signal insert art. no. System M 3976.., 3978.., System Basis 3977.., , OCTOCOLOR 3191... Neon lamp E 10, art. no. 395100. LED lamp E 10, art. no. 3951... Accessories: Hood for light signal E 10, art. no. 319011/12/13/ 14. — Contents: Without neon lamp. ˜

Version

Art. no.

hood, red

319016

Shatter-proof flat version for light signal E 10 insert.

AC 230 V, 2x1 mA For monitoring or lighting applications. ˜

To be completed with: Two-circuit control switch insert with N terminal, art. no. 325500. Roller shutter rocker switch insert with additional contact, art. no. 311502. — Contents: With neon lamp. Version

Art. no. 396176

PU PG 1/150 1

Info

Info

Hood for light signal E 10

Light attachment for multi switch

˜

PU PG 10/50 1

Accessories from: Light signal E 10 insert, art. no. 319016.

Version

Art. no.

red green clear yellow

319011 319012 319013 319014

PU PG 1/250 1/250 1/250 1/250

Info

1 1 1 1

disc.

Extension claws For suspending in the standard claw. For the installation of flush-mounted inserts such as switches, push-buttons, socket-outlets etc. in the case of flush-mounted boxes which are built in too deeply.

Light attachment for two-circuit switch AC 230 V, 2x1 mA For lighting purposes. To be completed with: Rocker switch insert, art. no. 311500. — Contents: With neon lamp. ˜

Version

Art. no. 396276

PU PG 1/150 1

Info

Contents: 1 PU consists of two extension claws and one rubber band.

Version

Art. no. 533591

disc.

PU PG

Info

50/900 1

Assortment of screws in plastic box Contents: 20 screws for socket-outlet covers, plain. 20 screws for socket-outlet covers, black. Version

Art. no.

www.merten.com

539591

326

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES | Accessories for universal inserts | ©2010

PU PG 14/224 1

Info


Flush-mounted inserts

FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES Capacitor

Surge protection module for socket-outlets

AC 230 V, 0.33 µF For use in push-button circuits to prevent flickering of the neon lamp and/or instantaneous switching of the installation relay when several push-buttons with neon lamps are in use. For interference suppression of inductive loads, e.g. relays, contactors, fluorescent lamps, transformers, if the induction voltage of these devices leads to the retriggering of the ARGUS. Version

Art. no.

AC 230 V, 0.33 µF

542895

PU PG

Info

10/450 8

Miniature version of direct line-side fine protection with acoustic fault signal. The module can be installed for example in waterproof SCHUKO socket-outlets. It is advisable to clearly mark the relevant cover of the socket-outlet. Type of protection: Fine protection Failure indication: Acoustic signal Version

Art. no.

red

533497

Base load

Art. no.

PU PG

542894

1/48 8

Version

Art. no. 550892

for 500/600 VA

550992

for 1000 VA

551092

for halogen and halogen super dimmers 500 VA for roller shutter control and time switch 1000 VA

551192

551292

PU PG 20/ 4080 20/ 4080 20/ 4080 20/ 4080

Info disc.

Mounting depth: 32 mm Type of protection: Fine protection Failure indication: Acoustic signal Special features: Test function Info

Version

8

8

DIN 42801 part 2 Suitable for use as a potential equalisation socket-outlet insert. Solder connection up to 6 mm2.

20/ 8 4080

To be completed with: Potential equalisation socket-outlet insert, art. no. System M 2904.., 2982.., 2906.., System Basis 2970.., System Design 2973.., OCTOCOLOR 2972...

Version

PU PG

Leakage current: (8/20) 4.5 kA (1x), 1 kA (100x) Residual voltage at discharge current: (1 kA) approx. 1000 V

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

615022

1/20 9.1

Info

Dirt cover for switches and socket-outlets For protection of switches and socket-outlets from damage due to painting/varnishing work. Version green

Art. no. MEG3900-0000

PU PG 1/60 1

Info new

Info

1/150 8 www.merten.com

552119

PU PG

Info

For professional labelling of DIN A4 labelling sheets in System Basis, System M, System Design and OCTOCOLOR.

10/300 8 10/300 8

AC 230 V, +6 % / -10 % For electronic transformers MET and ET dimmers. For protecting the transformer or dimmer during parallel operation of fluorescent lamps and other inductive loads with transformers. Connection parallel to the input side of the transformer or dimmer. 1 module for max. 10 transformers per circuit is recommended.

Art. no.

PU PG 10/500 1

Labelling software

Info

Surge protection module

Version

Art. no. 297190

Ø11.5 mm: art. no. 5761.., 5762.. Ø15.5 mm: year of manufacture up to 07.95: art. no. 5765.., 5766.., 5781.., 5782.. 576101 576102

Info

Potential equalisation angled connector

8

For roller shutter controls and time switches. The battery has a life of approx. 3-6 years.

ø 11.5 mm ø 15.5 mm

PU PG 1/50 8

8

Spare battery

Art. no.

Art. no. 533498

˜

Version

Info

For all combination SCHUKO flush-mounted socket-outlets. Suitable for standard size 60 installation box. It is advisable to clearly mark the cover of the relevant socket-outlet.

Replacement fuse for 400 W

PU PG 1/100 8

Surge protection module for socket-outlet combinations

Consists of 4 x 6 watt resistors. 1 set required per dimmer and per power booster in parallel connection (can be replaced by a 25 watt incandescent lamp). Version

A

©2010

| Accessories for universal inserts | FLUSH-MOUNTED INSERTS/ACCESSORIES

327


Radio system

Radio system Connect

THE SAFEST AND MOST RELIABLE CONNECTIONS The CONNECT radio system ensures reliability and safety. The transmitter and receiver makes constant use of re-routing technology, and the system operates free of interference at 868 MHz. Diagnostic aids that are easy to operate tell the user whether the radio connection is working. And Easy Connect facilitates quick and simple programming of the radio transmitter and receiver. This intelligent technology provides a reliable basis for current operations, and is paving the way for the innovations of the future. CONNECT is already employing Z-Wave®, the standard that will network the households of the future. Intelligent recording of electricity, gas, and water meters to enable energy-efficient and low CO2 operation. In addition, CONNECT is ideally suited as an addition to existing electrical installations. This makes it possible for existing buildings to be easily retrofitted with modern communication and control technology.

Without re-routing technology reflective wall

Radio transmitter

Radio receiver Radio receiver

No way through: with reflective walls or obstacles, the receiver waits for the radio signal in vain.

With re-routing technology reflective wall

Radio transmitter

Radio receiver Radio receiver

The most reliable solution: the new CONNECT radio system signal searches further "stopovers" for the best path to the desired receiver.

Z-Wave® is a registered trademark of Zensys Inc. and their branch offices in the USA and other countries. More information at: www.z-wavealliance.org.

www.merten.de

CONNECT radio push-button, 2-gang

328

Flush-mounted CONNECT radio receiver, universal dimmer Movement detector radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT

Radio system CONNECT | ©2010


Radio system Connect

Radio system

Contents

CONNECT radio central unit The CONNECT radio central unit connects numerous functions of the “radio world” and the “IP world” in a single control unit. You can access many functions even when you aren't home. The CONNECT radio central unit has an additional Ethernet connection and is controlled via merten@home.

High-resolution, backlit TFT colour display (number of colours: 16-bit/64.000, brightness: 400 cd/m2) Wide reading angle (60°–  80°) Real-time clock Very straightforward and convenient operation via dial ring (clickwheel) with four cursor keys and the enter key Favourite key (request menu) Home key calls up the menu structure directly Eight freely programmable push-buttons for direct control of functions Red status LEDs Individually configurable labelling field

Intended for flush mounting

www.merten.de

Integrated radio antenna Ethernet connection Available in the colours aluminium and polar white

©2010

| Radio system CONNECT

329


CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM Radio systemCONNECT radio systemSystem electronicsCONNECT radio systemCONNECT radio systemB

Radio system

Functions and device overview

B

Devices

Device features

Radio functions Radio features

CONNECT radio central unit, merten@home, colour 5059..

■■ Central device with eight freely programmable operator buttons ■■ merten@home user interface

CONNECT radio universal remote control 506923

■■ Remote control for the radio receivers, Merten IR devices, and up to five IR AV devices

CONNECT radio push-button, Move ■■ Mobile operating push button, battery powered System M 5080.., 5081.. System Design 5082..

CONNECT configuration tool (optional) ■■ CONNECT radio system, central control and visualisation ■■ Administration of central functions of the radio system (scenes, seasonal switch programs, history functions)

■■ Switch on, switch off, toggle, dim, raise/lower roller shutters, scene

■■ Graphic programming of the EASY CONNECT functions

■■ Toggle, dim

■■ Switch on, switch off, push-button operation (bell), scenes

CONNECT radio push-button, 1-gang System M 5061.., 5051.. System Design 5071..

■■ Operating push button, battery powered, 2 channels, 12 radio receivers/channel

■■ Switch on, switch off, dim, raise/ lower roller shutters

■■ Toggle, push-button operation (bell), scenes, division of channels

CONNECT radio push-button, 2-gang System M 5062.., 5052.. System Design 5072..

■■ Operating push button, battery powered, 4 channels, 12 radio receivers/channel

■■ Switch on, switch off, dim, raise/ lower roller shutters

■■ Toggle, push-button operation (bell), scenes, division of channels

CONNECT radio sensor surface, for ■■ Control buttons switch inserts System M: 5034.., 5024.. System Design: 5044..

■■ Toggle

■■ Staircase lighting function, ON/OFF delay, master/slave

CONNECT radio sensor surface for ■■ Control buttons dimmer inserts System M: 5036.., 5026.. System Design: 5046..

■■ Switch on (to memory value), switch off, dim

■■ Adjustable dimming speed, staircase lighting function, master/ slave, brightness limit, switch on to brightness limit, memory function that can be switched off

CONNECT radio roller shutter push- ■■ Control buttons button with sensor connection System M: 5035.., 5025.. System Design: 5045..

■■ Roller shutters Up/Down, save sun sensor light value locally

■■ Master/slave, slats, up/down duration

CONNECT radio transmitter flush-mounted, 4-gang 506004

■■ Battery powered, for up to 4 floating switch contacts ■■ Remote control of the receivers via push-buttons

CONNECT radio receiver, flushmounted, 1-gang switch 507501 AC 230 V, 10 A

■■ Switching a load via make contact

witching and dimming external ■■ S CONNECT radio receiver, flushmounted, 1-gang universal dimmer loads 507900 AC 230 V, 25 VA-250 VA

■■ Switch on, switch off, dim, raise/ lower shutters, push-button operation (bell), configuration as push-button or switch for all inputs. ■■ Switch on, switch off, toggle

■■ Staircase lighting function, ON/OFF delay

■■ Switch on (to memory value), switch off, dim

■■ Adjustable dimming speed, staircase lighting function, master/ slave, brightness limit, switch on to brightness limit, memory function that can be switched off

CONNECT radio receiver, flushmounted, 2-gang switch 507502 AC 230 V, 6 A

■■ Switching two loads via make contact

■■ 1. Channel can be used, switch on, switch off, toggle

■■ 2. Staircase lighting function, ON/OFF delay

CONNECT radio receiver, flushmounted, 1-gang switch, 2-pole 507601 AC 230 V, 10 A

■■ Switching a load via a 2-pole make contact

■■ Switch on, switch off, toggle

■■ Staircase lighting function, ON/OFF delay

CONNECT radio receiver, flushmounted, 1-gang roller shutter 507801 AC 230 V, 6 A, cos j = 0.6 500 VA

■■ Controlling a roller shutter drive

■■ Roller shutter Up/Down, Stop

■■ Slats, up/down duration

www.merten.com www.merten.de

330

EASY CONNECT

©2010 CONNECT RADIOCONNECT SYSTEM |©2010 Radio system


CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM Radio system

Functions and device overview Devices

Device features

B

Radio functions Radio features

EASY CONNECT

CONNECT configuration tool (optional)

CONNECT radio plug adapter, switch 508519 AC 230 V, 50 Hz 16 A, cosj=1, max. 35mF

■■ Switching external loads with SCHUKO plug

■■ Switch on, switch off, toggle

■■ Staircase lighting function, ON/OFF delay

CONNECT radio plug adapter, universal dimmer 508619 AC 230 V, 50 Hz 40 VA-350 VA

■■ Switching and dimming external loads with SCHUKO plug

■■ Switch on (to memory value), switch off, dim

■■ Adjustable dimming speed, staircase lighting function, brightness limit, switch on to brightness limit, memory function that can be switched off

Radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT 5095..

■■ Outdoor movement detector ■■ Up to four radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT devices can be networked and set via the remote control

Remote control for radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT 509590

■■ Radio remote control ■■ Functions: Permanent ON, permanent OFF, automatic, brightness threshold, switching duration, set and change the sensitivity to movement

CONNECT radio valve drive for heaters, comfort/standby 509201

■■ For manually adjusting the desired room temperature locally

■■ ARGUS is fully integrated into the radio network ■■ Teaching receivers ■■ Function module like scene, message and alarm

■■ Up to four radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT devices can be networked and set via the remote control

■■ Via radio central unit CONNECT: Reduce/increase temperature by 4 °C

Radio receiver for flush-mounted installation inserts

Functions

Design covers

System M

5034.., 5024..

System Design 5044.. Electronic switch insert 576799 (40 - 300 W)

Switching of ohmic loads

Relay switch insert 576897 0-1000 W/VA, max. 140 µF

Switching of ohmic, inductive or capacitive loads

Universal super dimmer insert 577099 For 50 Hz: 25 - 420 VA; For 60 Hz: 25 - 340 W

Dimming of ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads

Standard blind control insert 580698 (max. 1 motor 1000  VA)

Controlling a blind/roller shutter drive

Blind control insert with extension input 580699 (max. 1 motor 1000  VA)

Controlling a blind/roller shutter drive

CONNECT radio sensor surface for dimmer inserts

CONNECT radio roller shutter push-button with sensor connection

5036.., 5026..

5035.., 5025..

5046..

5045..

www.merten.de www.merten.com

CONNECT radio sensor surface, for switch inserts

©2010 ©2010

|| CONNECT RADIOCONNECT SYSTEM Radio system

331


CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM Radio systemCONNECT radio systemSystem electronicsCONNECT radio systemCONNECT radio systemB

Radio system

Merten CONNECT radio system The Merten CONNECT radio system is a bi-directional radio network. That means that all devices can transmit and receive signals simultaneously. It is possible, for example, for signals to be routed or for alternative radio transmission paths to be searched for (e.g. during temporary faults).

B

Technical Information: Radio system

CONNECT radio system, central unit

CONNECT radio central unit, merten@home, colour

There are two configuration methods: • The EASY CONNECT method: For the connection of max. five devices which are in the direct vicinity of one another (e.g. in one room). Configuration is carried out manually. Due to their complexity, some devices cannot be programmed with EASY CONNECT, or not all of the functions can be programmed. These devices are marked with a special symbol. • Using the CONNECT radio configuration tool: For systems between different rooms with up to 100 devices and extensive functions (scenes, central switching function, switch times, individual key assignment). For both types of installation method a so called "system administrator" must always be integrated.

Central device with eight freely programmable operator buttons and 3.5" colour display for the central control and visualisation of a Merten CONNECT radio system. The user interface is merten@home. Radio features: Router The radio central unit is configured with the CONNECT radio configurator. It is installed in a flush-mounted double box. For the optional flush mounted power supply an additional flush-mounted box is covered by the radio central unit. Functions: • Administration of central functions of the radio system (32 scenes, time switch with 20 weekly and 12 annual time switch programs, 1 history function) • IP address: fixed or dynamic assignment via DHCP • Integrated web server for PC operation, touch panel, PDA operation with merten@home • Integrated real-time clock with reserve power of 4 hrs. • Piezo loudspeaker for acoustic alarm • Alarm/message display and additional e-mail forwarding • Signalling when e-mails arrive • Multimedia application: Controlling network mp3 players or streaming clients • JPG image slide shows (FTP server on the Internet) • Displaying current news (RSS feeder)

Properties: • Secure transmission using frequency range 868 MHz • Clear addressing enables interference-free operation of multiple radio systems side by side • Very flexible installation and configuration • No cable routing required, due to the use of battery-powered transmitters • Extension of existing installations • Implementation of groups, scene controlling options and central functions • The extensive product spectrum covers all areas of application such as lighting control, roller shutter control, scene and heating control. • Simple teaching of freely programmable functions • Extremely flat, battery-powered push-buttons, e.g. for attaching to glass • Indoor transmission range: approx. 30 m (depending on place of installation and building characteristics such as materials and wall strengths) • Range in free field: approx. 100 m

Power consumption: max. approx. 7 W Power supply: DC 24 V, 0.3 A Operating elements: clickwheel, arrow buttons, back key, home key, 8 operator buttons for direct access Display size: 3.5“ (8.9 cm) Resolution: 320 x 240 pixels Display type: TFT with 16 million colours Interfaces: 1 x RJ45 Ethernet 10/100 MBit/s; CONNECT radio system Memory: 8 MB Flash/RAM Radio frequency: 868 MHz Radio range: up to 50 m in free field, up to 20 m indoors Dimensions: 220 x 105 x 50 mm (HxWxD) Type of protection: IP 20

Explanation of symbols: Z-Wave standard The device is compatible with Z-wave products from other manufacturers. The device can assume the functions of the system administrator. We recommend you use only fixed devices as system administrator (e.g. CONNECT radio push-button, 1-gang). The device has the routing function. It automatically relays signals and maintains fault-free operation. The device transmits signals.

The device receives signals and switches accordingly e.g. light or roller shutter.

www.merten.com

The EASY CONNECT method is not available or only available with restrictions.

332

Z-Wave® is a registered trademark of Zensys Inc. and their branch offices in the USA and other countries.

CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM | CONNECT radio system, central unit | ©2010

Accessories: Power supply, flush-mounted, art. no. 505599. Double mounting box, art. no. 528668. Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system. Receiver: All receivers of the Merten CONNECT radio system. — Note: A RJ45 connector suitable for field assembly is recommended for the Ethernet connection, e.g. FM45 from Reichle+DeMassari. The CONNECT radio configuration tool, including updates, is available at www.merten.de or on the Merten info CD. Contents: With design frame. ˜

Version

Art. no.

polar white aluminium

505919 505960

PU PG 1/6 8 1/6 8

Info


CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM Power supply, flush-mounted

CONNECT radio system, push-button

For supplying power to the CONNECT radio central unit, merten@home. The power supply is installed via a flush-mounted box directly above the radio central unit's flushmounted double box.

Radio remote control and IR remote control in a single device. For activating: • Devices of the Merten CONNECT radio system • Merten IR devices • Up to five IR AV devices such as TV, DVD, DVDR, VCR, SAT, cable, AMP and DMR In connection with the CONNECT radio system, several rooms can be set up with radio components using the remote control. Each room can be configured with up to 9 groups with maximum 12 devices and 3 scenes with maximum 12 devices. Radio features: System administrator, transmitter

For supplying power to: CONNECT radio central unit, merten@home, colour art. no. 5059...

Version

Art. no. 505599

PU PG

Info

1/70 8

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on, switch off, toggle, dim, raise/lower roller shutters, scene • Programming in EASY CONNECT as a system administrator • Individual programming of CONNECT radio push-buttons • Individual description of rooms and groups • Display of description in LCD display With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally graphic programming of the EASY CONNECT functions Extended functions for IR/AV: • Trigger Philips Ambilight • Supports more than 1,000 manufacturers. Devices are selected from a list or by entering programming codes. • General use of the functions of a device (e.g. volume) in all modes.

CONNECT radio system, configurator

CONNECT radio USB data interface For connecting a PC equipped with a USB interface to the Merten CONNECT radio system. The radio system is conveniently configured on the PC using the CONNECT radio configurator and is set up via the data interface. Radio features: System administrator Functions: • "plug and play" installation • Driver for all common Windows operating systems • Fastening clip for fastening on to a Notebook display • Power supply via the PC's USB interface. Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system. Receiver: All receivers of the Merten CONNECT radio system. — Contents: CD with CONNECT radio configuration tool, USB cable. ˜

Version

Art. no. 506801

PU PG

Radio range: up to 100 m in free field, up to 30 m indoors IR range: up to 15 m Battery: 3 microcells (IEC LR 03, AAA) Display element: LCD display with 10 characters

Info

1/12 8 ˜

CONNECT radio configuration tool Software for conveniently programming the Merten CONNECT radio system components. Functions: • Graphic user interface. To link the components, drag the connection lines with the mouse. • Filter functions • Analysis and search functions • Diagnostics functions: e.g. single diagnosis of the radio system at the installation location • Conformance measurement • Documentation of installation and diagnostics log

Receiver: All receivers of the Merten CONNECT radio system. Note: The device can assume the properties of a system administrator. The remote control must be used as the system administrator in connection with the EASY CONNECT method. In connection with the CONNECT radio configurator, it can be used as required. Contents: With battery.With a codes table for nearly all conventional devices, like TV, VCR, DVD, SAT, AUX, ...

Version

Art. no.

Aluminium/black

506923

PU PG

Info

1/6 8

Note: The CONNECT radio configuration tool, including updates, is available at www.merten.de or on the Merten info CD.

www.merten.com

B

CONNECT radio universal remote control

Primary supply: AC 230 V, 48-63 Hz Output voltage: DC 24 V +/- 3 % Output current: max. 0.5 A Connecting terminals:Screw terminals ˜

Radio system

©2010

| CONNECT radio system, configurator | CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM

333


CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM Radio system

B

CONNECT radio push-button, Move

CONNECT radio push-button, 1-gang

For System M. Battery-powered mobile radio transmitter with 1 channel. For activating the Merten CONNECT radio system's radio receiver. A maximum of 12 radio receivers can be connected. Radio features: System administrator (see note) Suitable for sticking onto walls or glass, screwing onto walls or flush-mounted outlets, or installing in a multiple combination. A flush-mounted box is not required. Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Toggle, dim With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally switch on, switch off, push-button operation (bell), scenes

For System M. Battery-powered radio transmitter with 2 channels. For activating the Merten CONNECT radio system's radio receiver. A maximum of 12 radio receivers per channel can be connected. Radio features: System administrator Suitable for sticking onto walls or glass, screwing onto walls or flush-mounted outlets, or installing in a multiple combination. A flush-mounted box is not required. Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on, switch off, dim, raise/lower roller shutters With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally toggle, push-button operation (bell), scenes, division of channels

Channels: 1 Range: up to 100 m free field, up to 30 m indoors Battery: 1 lithium button cell (CR 2450N) Display elements: LED for transmission confirmation/programming Dimensions: 44 x 12.5 mm (Ø x H) ˜ —

Receiver: All receivers of the Merten CONNECT radio system. Note: The device can assume the features and characteristics of the system administrator. As it concerns a mobile device we recommend that you preferably select a fixed device as system administrator. Instead use for example a CONNECT radio push-button, 1-gang. Contents: Battery, wall bracket, double-sided adhesive strips, single-sided adhesive foils aluminium-coloured, screws, dowels.

Version ˜

Info

508144 508119 508125

1/40 8 1/40 8 1/40 8

508044 508019 508014 508060

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM | CONNECT radio system, push-button | ©2010

Receiver: All receivers of the Merten CONNECT radio system. Contents: Battery, retaining plate, double-sided adhesive strips, single-sided adhesive foils aluminium-coloured, screws, dowels.

Version ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy

506144 506119 506125

1/40 8 1/40 8 1/40 8

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

1/40 1/40 1/40 1/40

www.merten.com

334

˜

˜

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

Channels: 2 Range: up to 100 m free field, up to 30 m indoors Battery: 1 lithium button cell (CR 2450N) Display elements: LED for transmission confirmation/programming

505144 505119 505114 505160

1/40 1/40 1/40 1/40

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant


CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM CONNECT radio push-button, 2-gang

CONNECT radio push-button, Move

For System M. Battery-powered radio transmitter with 4 channels. For activating the Merten CONNECT radio system's radio receiver. A maximum of 12 radio receivers per channel can be connected. Radio features: System administrator Suitable for sticking onto walls or glass, screwing onto walls or flush-mounted outlets, or installing in a multiple combination. A flush-mounted box is not required. Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on, switch off, dim, raise/lower roller shutters With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally toggle, push-button operation (bell), scenes, division of channels

For System Design. Battery-powered mobile radio transmitter with 1 channel. For activating the Merten CONNECT radio system's radio receiver. A maximum of 12 radio receivers can be connected. Radio features: System administrator (see note) Suitable for sticking onto walls or glass, screwing onto walls or flush-mounted outlets, or installing in a multiple combination. A flush-mounted box is not required. Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Toggle, dim With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally switch on, switch off, push-button operation (bell), scenes

Receiver: All receivers of the Merten CONNECT radio system. Contents: Battery, retaining plate, double-sided adhesive strips, single-sided adhesive foils aluminium-coloured, screws, dowels.

Version ˜

Info

506244 506219 506225

1/40 8 1/40 8 1/40 8

505244 505219 505214 505260

1/40 1/40 1/40 1/40

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

Receiver: All receivers of the Merten CONNECT radio system. Note: The device can assume the features and characteristics of the system administrator. As it concerns a mobile device we recommend that you preferably select a fixed device as system administrator. Instead use for example a CONNECT radio push-button, 1-gang. Contents: Battery, wall bracket, double-sided adhesive strips, single-sided adhesive foils aluminium-coloured, screws, dowels.

Version

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

˜

˜

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white aluminium ˜

Art. no.

508244 508219 508260

1/40 8 1/40 8 1/40 8

508246

1/40 8

metallic

varnished stainless steel

www.merten.com

B

Channels: 1 Range: up to 100 m free field, up to 30 m indoors Battery: 1 lithium button cell (CR 2450N) Display elements: LED for transmission confirmation/programming Dimensions: 44 x 12.5 mm (Ø x H)

Channels: 4 Range: up to 100 m free field, up to 30 m indoors Battery: 1 lithium button cell (CR 2450N) Display elements: LED for transmission confirmation/programming ˜

Radio system

©2010

| CONNECT radio system, push-button | CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM

335


CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM Radio system

B

˜ —

CONNECT radio push-button, 1-gang

CONNECT radio push-button, 2-gang

For System Design. Battery-powered radio transmitter with 2 channels. For activating the Merten CONNECT radio system's radio receiver. A maximum of 12 radio receivers per channel can be connected. Radio features: System administrator Suitable for sticking onto walls or glass, screwing onto walls or flush-mounted outlets, or installing in a multiple combination. A flush-mounted box is not required. Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on, switch off, dim, raise/lower roller shutters With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally toggle, push-button operation (bell), scenes, division of channels

For System Design. Battery-powered radio transmitter with 4 channels. For activating the Merten CONNECT radio system's radio receiver. A maximum of 12 radio receivers per channel can be connected. Radio features: System administrator Suitable for sticking onto walls or glass, screwing onto walls or flush-mounted outlets, or installing in a multiple combination. A flush-mounted box is not required. Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on, switch off, dim, raise/lower roller shutters With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally toggle, push-button operation (bell), scenes, division of channels

Channels: 2 Range: up to 100 m free field, up to 30 m indoors Battery: 1 lithium button cell (CR 2450N) Display elements: LED for transmission confirmation/programming

Channels: 4 Range: up to 100 m free field, up to 30 m indoors Battery: 1 lithium button cell (CR 2450N) Display elements: LED for transmission confirmation/programming

Receiver: All receivers of the Merten CONNECT radio system. Contents: Battery, retaining plate, double-sided adhesive strips, single-sided adhesive foils aluminium-coloured, screws, dowels.

Version ˜

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white aluminium ˜

Art. no.

1/40 8 1/40 8 1/40 8

507146

1/40 8

Receiver: All receivers of the Merten CONNECT radio system. Contents: Battery, retaining plate, double-sided adhesive strips, single-sided adhesive foils aluminium-coloured, screws, dowels.

Version ˜

507144 507119 507160

metallic

varnished stainless steel

˜

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white aluminium ˜

Art. no.

507244 507219 507260

1/40 8 1/40 8 1/40 8

507246

1/40 8

metallic

varnished stainless steel

CONNECT radio transmitter flushmounted, 4-gang Battery-powered radio transmitter for connecting up to 4 floating switch contacts (e.g. standard push-buttons). For the remote control of other receivers from the Merten CONNECT radio system via push-buttons from the Merten switch ranges. Radio features: Transmitter Automatic recognition of the connected devices (switches or push-buttons). Suitable for installation underneath push-button inserts or in empty flush-mounted boxes. Functions: With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • Switch on, switch off, toggle, dim, raise/lower shutters, push-button operation (bell), configuration as push-button or switch for all inputs. Channels: 4 Range: up to 100 m (free field) up to 30 m (building) Battery: 1 lithium button cell (CR 2450N) Display elements: LED for send confirmation Dimensions: 43 x 41 x 14 mm (H x W x D) ˜

Receiver: All receivers of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

Version

Art. no.

www.merten.com

506004

336

CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM | CONNECT radio system, push-button | ©2010

PU PG 1/100 8

Info


CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM CONNECT radio sensor cover for dimmer inserts

CONNECT radio system, switching/dimming

Universal super dimmer insert

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on (to memory value), switch off, dim With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally adjustable dimming speed, staircase lighting function, master/slave, brightness limit, switch on to brightness limit, memory function that can be switched off

Neutral conductor: not required (2 conductor system) ˜

Version

Art. no.

25-420 VA

577099

PU PG

˜

To be completed with: Universal super dimmer insert, art. no. 577099 from version 3A. Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

Version ˜

˜

1/100 8

Switching capacity: 0-1000 VA Capacitive load: max. 140 µF Neutral conductor: required (3 conductor system) To be completed with: ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5755.., 5784.., System Basis 5782.., System Design 5786.., OCTOCOLOR 5753.., AQUADESIGN 5781... ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module with switch, art. no. System M 5728.., 5785.., System Basis 5783.., System Design 5795.., OCTOCOLOR 5756... ARGUS 180/2.20 m flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5688.., 5687... In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT sensor cover for switch inserts art. no. System M 5034.., 5024..., System Design 5044... – Technical Information — Note: Replace the relay switch insert, art. no. 576899. ˜

Version

Art. no.

0-1000 VA

576897

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

Info

503644 503619 503625

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

504646

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

502644 502619 502614 502660

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

www.merten.com

˜

504644 504619 504660

AC 230 V For ohmic and complex loads such as incandescent lamps, fluorescent lamps, energy-saving lamps, LV halogen lighting etc.

To be completed with: Universal super dimmer insert, art. no. 577099 from version 3A. Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system. PU PG

Info

Relay switch insert

1/50 8

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on (to memory value), switch off, dim With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally adjustable dimming speed, staircase lighting function, master/slave, brightness limit, switch on to brightness limit, memory function that can be switched off

Art. no.

PU PG

metallic

varnished stainless steel

Info

For System M. Operator button to toggle or switch/dim an output. Manual operation and remote control possible via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. Radio features: Router

Version

Art. no.

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white aluminium

CONNECT radio sensor cover for dimmer inserts

˜

B

For System Design. Operator button to toggle or switch/dim an output. Manual operation and remote control possible via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. Radio features: Router

AC 230 V For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads, e.g. incandescent lamps, dimmable wound transformers or electronic transformers. Phase control or phase alignment The universal dimmer automatically recognises the connected load. Do not connect any mixed loads. With memory function, can be switched off.

To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Central plate comfort rotating regulator for Universal super dimmer insert, art. no. System M 5678.., 5677... In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT sensor cover for dimmer inserts art. No. System M 5036.., 5026..., System Design 5046... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information — Note: The insert from version 3A only can be used in conjunction with the CONNECT radio system.

Radio system

©2010

| CONNECT radio system, switching/dimming | CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM

337


CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM Electronic switch insert

Radio system

CONNECT radio sensor cover, for switch inserts

AC 230 V For ohmic load such as incandescent lamps, 230 V halogen lamps.

B

For System Design. Operator button for switching an output. Manual operation and remote control possible via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. Radio features: Router

Switching capacity: 40-300 W Neutral conductor: not required (2 conductor system) To be completed with: ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5755.., 5784.., System Basis 5782.., System Design 5786.., OCTOCOLOR 5753.., AQUADESIGN 5781... ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module with switch, art. no. System M 5728.., 5785.., System Basis 5783.., System Design 5795.., OCTOCOLOR 5756... ARGUS 180/2.20 m flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5688.., 5687... In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT sensor cover for switch inserts art. no. System M 5034.., 5024..., System Design 5044... – Technical Information — Note: A maximum of two electronic switch inserts may be wired in parallel. The insert from version 2A only can be used in conjunction with the CONNECT radio system.

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Toggle With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally staircase lighting function, ON/ OFF delay, master/slave

˜

Version

Art. no.

40-300 W

576799

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

˜

To be completed with: Relay switch insert, art. no. 576897. Electronic switch insert, art. no. 576799 from version 2A. Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

Version

white polar white aluminium

˜

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

503444 503419 503425

502444 502419 502414 502460

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

504446

1/100 8

Nominal voltage: AC 230 V Nominal current: 10 A Connected loads: Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, 2000 W Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, 1500 W Capacitive load: 35 µF Display elements: LED for status display Operating elements: Push-button for local operation and programming Dimensions: 48 x 52 x 27 mm (H x W x D)

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

PU PG

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

For switching loads via a make contact. Can be remote-controlled via transmitters in the Merten CONNECT system. Radio features: Router Suitable for installation into a size 60 installation box.With snap-off mounting plates. With screw terminals. Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on, switch off, toggle With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally staircase lighting function, ON/ OFF delay

To be completed with: Relay switch insert, art. no. 576897. Electronic switch insert, art. no. 576799 from version 2A. Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system. Art. no.

504444 504419 504460

CONNECT radio receiver, flushmounted, 1-gang switch

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Toggle With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally staircase lighting function, ON/ OFF delay, master/slave

Version

˜

Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

Version

Art. no.

www.merten.com

507501

338

Info

metallic

varnished stainless steel

For System M. Operator button for switching an output. Manual operation and remote control possible via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. Radio features: Router

˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

˜

˜

CONNECT radio sensor cover, for switch inserts

Art. no.

CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM | CONNECT radio system, switching/dimming | ©2010

PU PG 1/100 8

Info


CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM CONNECT radio receiver, flushmounted, 1-gang universal dimmer

CONNECT radio receiver, flushmounted, 1-gang switch, 2-pole

AC 230 V To switch and dim external loads. Radio feature: router For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads, e.g. incandescent lamps, dimmable wound transformers and electronic transformers. (Phase control or phase alignment). Manual operation using the key on the device via an extension unit and remote controlled using the CONNECT radio system's transmitter. The integrated universal dimmer automatically recognises the connected load. Do not connect any mixed loads. With memory function. Suitable for installation into a size 60 installation box.With snap-off mounting plates. Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on (to memory value), switch off, dim With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally adjustable dimming speed, staircase lighting function, master/slave, brightness limit, switch on to brightness limit, memory function that can be switched off Nominal voltage: AC 230 V Minimum load: 25 VA Maximum load: 250 VA Display elements: LED for status display Operating elements: Key for local operation and programming Safety: Overload protection, short-circuit protection Dimensions: 48 x 52 x 27 mm (HxWxD) ˜

Art. no. 507900

PU PG

Nominal voltage: AC 230 V Nominal current: 10 A Connected loads: Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, 1200 W Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, 800 W Capacitive load: 14 µF Display elements: LED for status display Operating elements: Push-button for local operation and programming Dimensions: 48 x 52 x 27 mm (H x W x D) ˜

Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

Version

Info

AC 230 V, 50 Hz For switching external loads with SCHUKO plug. Radio features: Router Manual operation via the sensor surface and remote control possible via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on, switch off, toggle With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally staircase lighting function, ON/ OFF delay

CONNECT radio receiver, flushmounted, 2-gang switch

Nominal voltage: AC 230 V, 50 Hz Nominal current:16 A, cos = 1 Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2000 W Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2000 W Capacitive load: max. 35 µF Dimensions: 120x65x38 mm (HxWxD) Display elements: LED for status display Operating elements: Sensor surface for local operation and programming Type of protection: IP 20 ˜

Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

Version

Art. no.

polar white

508519

PU PG

Info

1/16 8

Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

Version

Art. no. 507502

PU PG

www.merten.com

˜

PU PG 1/100 8

CONNECT radio plug adapter, switch

Info

Nominal voltage: AC 230 V Nominal current: 6 A Connected loads: Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, 600 W Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, 600 W Display elements: LED for status display Operating elements: Push-button for local operation and programming Dimensions: 48 x 52 x 27 mm (H x W x D)

Art. no. 507601

1/100 8

For switching two loads via make contact. Can be remote-controlled via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. Radio features: router Suitable for installation into a size 60 installation box.With snap-off mounting plates. With screw terminals. Functions: EASY CONNECT: • 1. Channel can be used, switch on, switch off, toggle With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • 2. additionally staircase lighting function, ON/ OFF delay

B

For switching a load via a 2-pole make contact. Can be remote-controlled via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. Radio features: router Suitable for installation into a size 60 installation box.With snap-off mounting plates. With screw terminals. Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on, switch off, toggle With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally staircase lighting function, ON/ OFF delay

Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

Version

Radio system

Info

1/100 8

©2010

| CONNECT radio system, switching/dimming | CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM

339


CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM Radio system

B

CONNECT radio plug adapter, universal dimmer

Blind control insert with extension input

AC 230 V, 50 Hz For switching and dimming external loads with SCHUKO plug. Radio features: Router For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads, e.g. incandescent lamps, dimmable wound transformers and electronic transformers. (Phase control or phase alignment). Manual operation via the sensor surface and remote control possible via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. The integrated universal dimmer automatically recognises the connected load. Do not connect any mixed loads. With memory function, can be switched off.

AC 230 V, 50 Hz For controlling a blind/roller shutter motor with limit switch. A mechanical roller shutter switch/push-button or an additional blind control insert can be connected via the extension input to implement group/central control. Wind alarm function possible with extension input. Motor protection through interlocked relay contacts.

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on (to memory value), switch off, dim With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally adjustable dimming speed, staircase lighting function, brightness limit, switch on to brightness limit, memory function that can be switched off Nominal voltage: AC 230 V, 50 Hz Minimum load:40 VA Maximum load:350 VA Dimensions: 120x65x38 mm (HxWxD) Display elements: LED for status display Operating elements: Sensor surface for local operation and programming Type of protection: IP 20 ˜ –

Nominal voltage: AC 230 V, 50 Hz Neutral conductor: required Switching capacity: max. 1 motor 1000 VA Outputs: 2 make contacts (interlocked) Reversing time: minimum 500 ms Connecting terminals: Screw terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2x1.5 mm2 To be completed with: Blind push-buttons and blind time switches for the blind control system. In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT radio roller shutter push-button with sensor connection art. No. System M 5035.., 5025..., System Design 5045... Accessories: Wind sensor interface, art. no. 580693. – Technical Information — Note: In combination with the standard blind time switch, art. no. 5809.., 5859.., 5839.., 5819.., the extension input does not work. ˜

Version

Art. no.

1000 VA

580699

Version

Art. no. 508619

PU PG

For System M. Operating button for roller shutter motors. Manual operation and remote control possible via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. With electronic locking device. Possible to connect sun/twilight sensor. Radio features: Router A screw terminal on the blind control insert connects the sensor cable with the roller shutter push-button. Brightness value of sun sensor set to approx. 20000 lux.

Info

1/16 8

CONNECT radio system, roller shutter

Standard blind control insert

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Roller shutters Up/Down, save sun sensor light value locally With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally master/slave, louvres, up/down duration

AC 230 V, 50 Hz For local control of a blind/roller shutter motor with limit switch. Motor protection through interlocked relay contacts. Without extension input. Nominal voltage: AC 230 V, 50 Hz Neutral conductor:required Switching capacity: max. 1 motor 1000 VA Outputs: 2 make contacts (interlocked) Pulse duration: 2 minutes Connecting terminals: Screw terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2x1.5 mm2 To be completed with: Blind push-buttons and blind time switches for the blind control system. In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT radio roller shutter push-button with sensor connection art. No. System M 5035.., 5025..., System Design 5045... – Technical Information

˜

1000 VA

580698

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

www.merten.com

Art. no.

340

˜

˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy

503544 503519 503525

1/60 8 1/60 8 1/60 8

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM | CONNECT radio system, roller shutter | ©2010

To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

Version

˜

Version

Info

CONNECT radio roller shutter push-button with sensor connection

Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system. Technical Information

polar white

PU PG 1/50 8

502544 502519 502514 502560

1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant


CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM CONNECT radio roller shutter push-button with sensor connection

CONNECT radio system, ARGUS movement detector

Electronic outdoor movement detector. 220° surface monitoring for large house fronts and sections of the house. • 360° short-range zone (approx. 4 m radius). • Large wiring compartment and plug system. • Looping is possible. • LED function display for fast alignment at the installation site. • Operating elements are protected under the easily accessible cover plate. • Flexibly adjustable sensor head. • Possible to blank out individual lens areas. Can be installed on walls and ceilings without additional accessories. Can be mounted on inner/outer corners and stationary pipes using a mounting bracket. Functions: Up to four radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT devices can be networked and set via the remote control (permanent ON, permanent OFF, automatic, brightness threshold, switching time, set and change the sensitivity to movement.) In conjunction with the CONNECT radio configuration tool, you can: • fully integrate the radio ARGUS 200 CONNECT into the radio network and network with other devices. • Teaching receivers. • Use function module like scene, message and alarm.

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Roller shutters Up/Down, save sun sensor light value locally With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally master/slave, louvres, up/down duration To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

˜

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white aluminium ˜

Art. no.

504544 504519 504560

1/60 8 1/60 8 1/60 8

504546

1/60 8

metallic

varnished stainless steel

Mains voltage: AC 230 V ±10 %, 50 Hz Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2000 W Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2000 W Fluorescent lamps: AC 230 V, 1200 W uncompensated Capacitive load: max. 35 µF Max. switching current: 16 A, AC 230 V, cos = 1 Angle of detection: 220° Range: max. 16 m Number of levels: 7 Number of zones: 112 with 448 switching segments Light sensor: infinitely adjustable from 31000 Lux Time: 1 sec. to approx. 8 min. in 6 steps Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Neutral conductor: required Sensor head adjustment for wall mounting: 9° up, 24° down, 12° left/right, ± 12° axial Sensor head adjustment for ceiling mounting: 4° up, 29° down, 25° left/right, ± 8.5° axial EC directives: Low voltage directive 2006/95/ EEC and EMC directive 2004/108/EEC Radio frequency: 868 MHz Transmission range: up to 100 m in free field, up to 30 m indoors Type of protection: IP 55 Dimensions: 151x93x71 mm (HxWxD)

CONNECT radio receiver, flushmounted, 1-gang roller shutter For controlling a roller shutter drive. Can be remote-controlled via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. Radio features: router Suitable for installation into a size 60 installation box.With snap-off mounting plates. With screw terminals. Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Roller shutter Up/Down, Stop With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • Louvres, up/down duration Nominal voltage: AC 230 V Nominal current: 6 A, cos =0.6 Connected loads: Motor load: AC 230 V, 500 VA Display elements: LED for status display Operating elements: Push-button for local operation and programming Dimensions: 48 x 52 x 27 mm (H x W x D) ˜

Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

Version

Art. no. 507801

PU PG

Info

Accessories: Remote control for radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT, art. no. 509590. Mounting bracket, art. no. 565291, 565293. Capacitor, art. no. 542895. — Contents: With cover plate and segments to limit the area of detection, screws and plugs. ˜

1/100 8

©2010

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white aluminium

509519 509560

1/12 8.4 1/12 8.4

Info

| CONNECT radio system, ARGUS movement detector | CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM

www.merten.com

Version

B

Radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT

For System Design. Operating button for roller shutter motors. Manual operation and remote control possible via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. With electronic locking device. Possible to connect sun/twilight sensor. Radio features: Router A screw terminal on the blind control insert connects the sensor cable with the roller shutter push-button. Brightness value of sun sensor set to approx. 20000 lux.

˜

Radio system

341


CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM Remote control for radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT

Radio system

B

One radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT or one radio receiver switch each can be taught, networked and set for each key (A1-A4) on the remote control. Functions: You can set the following functions on the ARGUS: Operating mode (permanent ON, permanent OFF, automatic), brightness threshold, switching duration, set and change the sensitivity to movement. Channels: 4 Radio frequency: 868 MHz Range: up to 100 m in free field, up to 30 m indoors Battery: 1 lithium button cell (CR 2450N) Display elements: Status LED ˜ —

Receiver: Radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT, art. no. 5095... Contents: With battery.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

509590

1/48 8.4

Info

CONNECT radio system, heating

CONNECT radio valve drive for heaters, comfort/standby Heating thermostat for manually adjusting the desired room temperature in situ. With limitation facility of the mechanical adjusting range. Thermostat head is suitable for Heimeier valves M 30 x 1.5. Functions: With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • In conjunction with the CONNECT radio central unit, the temperature can, for instance, be raised or lowered by 4 °C. Operating elements: Programming button, key for toggling between comfort/standby Display elements: Comfort (Sun), standby (Moon) Battery: 2 Mignon 1.5 V (IEC LR 6, AA) Battery service life: approximately 2 heating periods Temperature range: 8 - 28°C ˜

Transmitter: CONNECT radio central unit, merten@home, colour art. no. 5059... Art. no. 509201

PU PG 1/10 8

Info disc.

www.merten.com

Version polar white

342

CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM | CONNECT radio system, heating | ©2010


CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM Radio system

www.merten.com

B

©2010

| CONNECT radio system, heating | CONNECT RADIO SYSTEM

343


DIMMER SYSTEM

Dimmer system

Individual requirements. Individual solutions.

Universal dimmer insert, 2-gang

Dial-type light dimmer

Universal dimmer REG

One for all. The new universal dimmer insert has 2 channels, each of which can be operated with a maximum load of 200 watts.

First-class dimming. A dimmer that's got the lot: easy to operate, multiple functions and a good memory. The convenient dial can do much more than just make the light brighter or darker. For example, with the touch of a button, the maximum brightness can be limited to 80 %. The memory button can be used to save favourite brightness values. The convenient dial even helps you in the dark: with the discreet orientation light that can also be deactivated when not needed.

Flexible dimming. The universal dimmers REG make implementing or changing dimming functions fast and easy. Loads can be dimmed via the channel buttons on the device or via an extension unit (push-button or electronic (TELE) extension unit). Ten electric and any number of mechanical push-buttons can be connected per channel.

Best of all: these loads can be completely different – purely ohmic loads, ohmic and capacitive loads, or ohmic and inductive loads. Another advantage: irrespective of which load is connected – the new two-circuit dimmer detects it automatically.

www.merten.de

Another nice new feature: with imme­ diate effect, a simple two-circuit switch can be exchanged for a 2-gang dimmer without a second box having to be positioned, as used to be the case.

344

Dimmer system / Transformers | ©2010


DIMMER SYSTEM

Contents

Dimmer system

NEW

Universal rotary dimmer insert for ohmic, capacitive and inductive loads

Universal dimmer insert, 2-gang

Convenient dial for universal super-dimmer insert

www.merten.de

2-gang universal dimmer – the first two-circuit dimmer from Merten

©2010

| Dimmer system / Transformers

345


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS Dimmer systemDimmer system/transformersSystem electronicsDimmer system/transformersDimmer system/transformersD

Functions and device overview Function

inserts

Design cover Local operation

Dimmer system

D

Sensor surface System M

Electronic switch (2 conductors - neutral conductor is not required) Switching of ohmic loads ■■ Incandescent lamps, 230 V halogen lamps ■■ Extension input for push-buttons and extension TELE inserts

Electronic switch insert 575799 (25 - 400 W) AC 220-230 V, 50-60 Hz

Switching of ohmic loads ■■ Incandescent lamps, 230 V halogen lamps

Electronic switch insert 576799 (40 - 300 W)

Pulse generator for surge switches or protective circuits ■■ The switching function is determined by the surge switch/protective circuit used. ■■ Extension input for push-buttons and extension TELE inserts

Electronic push-button insert 574697 (4 - 100 VA)

Relay switch (3 conductors - neutral conductor is required) Switching, timed switching, push-button operation of ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads ■■ Push-button function, time function, switch function ■■ Incandescent lamps, energy-saving lamps, LV halogen lamps with conventional transformer, fluorescent lamps ■■ Extension input for push-buttons and extension TELE inserts

Universal relay insert 575897 AC 220-230 V, 50-60 Hz, max. 1000 W/VA; 500 VA for LV halogen lamps with conventional transformer, max 140 µF

Switching of ohmic, inductive or capacitive loads ■■ Incandescent lamps, fluorescent lamps, energy-saving lamps, LV halogen lighting etc.

Relay switch insert 576897 0-1000 W/VA, max. 140 μF

Dimmer (2 conductors - neutral conductor is not required) Dimming of ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads ■■ Incandescent lamps, 230 V halogen lamps, dimmable wound transformers, electronic transformers ■■ Phase control or phase alignment ■■ Extension input for push-buttons and extension TELE inserts

Universal super dimmer insert 577099 For 50 Hz: 25 - 420 VA; For 60 Hz: 25 - 340 W

Dimming of ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads ■■ Incandescent lamps, 230 V halogen lamps, dimmable wound transformers, electronic transformers ■■ Phase control or phase alignment ■■ Extension input for push-buttons and extension inserts

Universal dimmer insert, 2-gang 568099 AC 230 V, 50-60 Hz, 2 x 50-200 VA

Dimming of ohmic loads ■■ Incandescent lamps, 230 V halogen lamps ■■ Phase control ■■ Extension input for push-buttons and extension TELE inserts

Memory super dimmer insert for ohmic load 573399 (60 - 400 W) 577299 (60 - 600 W, halogen 500 W)

Dimming of inductive loads ■■ Dimmable, wound transformers and incandescent lamps ■■ Phase control ■■ Extension input for push-buttons and extension TELE inserts

Memory halogen super dimmer insert for inductive load 573599 (20 - 500 VA)

Dimming of capacitive loads ■■ Electronic transformers and incandescent lamps ■■ Phase alignment ■■ Extension unit operation with mechanical push-buttons or universal relay insert, art. no. 575897 with configured push-button function.

Memory ET super dimmer insert for capacitive load 577899 (20 - 315 W)

Extension unit Extension inserts 573999

Operator function as extension unit like main unit ■■ Control of the extension input of the main unit; can be operated remotely ■■ Neutral conductor required

Extension TELE insert 573998

www.merten.com www.merten.de

Operator function as extension unit like main unit ■■ Control of the extension input of the main unit

346

©2010 DIMMER system / Transformers SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS | ©2010 Dimmer

5776.., 5701.., 5704..

System Design

5737..

System Basis

5741..

OCTOCOLOR

5742..

AQUADESIGN

5738..


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

Local operation /  IR remote control

Local operation

Local operation

Local operation/radio remote control: CONNECT radio system

Local operation Dimmer system

TELE sensor surface

Comfort rotating regulator for universal super-dimmer insert

2-gang push-button module

CONNECT radio sensor surface CONNECT radio sensor surfor dimmer inserts face, for switch inserts

5779.., 5703.., 5711..

5677.., 5678...

568499

5026.., 5036..

5024.., 5034..

568199

5046..

5044

5709..

D

Control electronics, 1-gang 569090

5748.. 5749..

from version 2A

from version 3A Minimum load: 40 W

www.merten.de www.merten.com

from version 1F Minimum load: 40 W

©2010 ©2010

| Dimmer DIMMER system / Transformers SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

347


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS Central plate of comfort rotating regulator for universal super dimmer insert

Dimmer systemDimmer system/transformersSystem electronicsDimmer system/transformersDimmer system/transformersD

Explanation of symbols for dimmers: 230 V incandescent lamps 230 V halogen lamps

For System M. Manual operation. With the rotary knob and four operating surfaces for further functions. The light segments arranged around the rotary knob show the set brightness value. Functions: • Switching on and off by pressing or turning the rotary knob • The dimming speed depends on the rotational speed • Retrieving/storing two brightness values • Switching orientation light on/off • Switching energy saving function on/off (restriction of the max. brightness to 80%)

Dimmable, wound transformers

Dimmer system

Electronic transformers for phase alignment dimmer

D

Electric motors –

Technical Information: Dimmer basics

Comfort rotary dimmer

Universal super dimmer insert AC 230 V For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads, e.g. incandescent lamps, dimmable wound transformers or electronic transformers. Phase control or phase alignment The universal dimmer automatically recognises the connected load. Do not connect any mixed loads. With memory function, can be switched off. Neutral conductor: not required (2 conductor system) To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Central plate comfort rotating regulator for Universal super dimmer insert, art. no. System M 5678.., 5677... In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT sensor cover for dimmer inserts art. No. System M 5036.., 5026..., System Design 5046... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information — Note: The insert from version 3A only can be used in conjunction with the CONNECT radio system. ˜

Version

Art. no.

25-420 VA

577099

PU PG

˜

To be completed with: Universal super dimmer insert, art. no. 577099.

Version ˜

567744 567719 567714 567760

1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60

8 8 8 8

Universal rotary dimmer insert AC 230 V, 50 Hz For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads, e.g. incandescent lamps, dimmable wound transformers or electronic transformers. Phase control or phase alignment The universal dimmer automatically recognises the connected load. Do not connect any mixed loads. With pressure-operated two-way switch.

Info

To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR.

Version 20-420 W/VA 20-600 W/VA

www.merten.com

1/60 8 1/60 8 1/60 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

1/50 8

DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS | Comfort rotary dimmer | ©2010

567844 567819 567825

Rotary dimmers

˜

348

Info

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

Art. no. MEG5138-0000 MEG5139-0000

PU PG 1/72 8 1/72 8

Info new new


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS Rotary dimmer insert for ohmic load with pressure-operated on/ off switch

Rotary dimmer insert for inductive load AC 230 V, 50 Hz For dimmable, wound transformers, incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps (inductive/ ohmic load). (Phase control). With pressure-operated on/off switch.

AC 230 V, 50 Hz For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. (Phase control). With pressure-operated on/off switch. To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR. – Technical Information Version

Art. no. MEG5131-0000

PU PG 1/72 8

Info new

Rotary dimmer insert for ohmic load with pressure-operated twoway switch

To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

60-1000 VA

To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR. – Technical Information 40-400 W

MEG5132-0000

PU PG 1/72 8

Info new

Rotary dimmer insert for inductive load AC 230 V, 50 Hz For dimmable, wound transformers, incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps (inductive/ ohmic load). (Phase control). With pressure-operated two-way switch.

To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR. – Technical Information — Note: Suitable for Merten MET transformers. Version

Art. no.

20-315 W

MEG5136-0000

PU PG 1/72 8

Info new

Info new

AC 230 V, 50 Hz For electronic transformers and incandescent lamps (ohmic load). (Phase alignment). With pressure-operated two-way switch. Noise-free, short-circuit-proof, with overload protection, and soft start function to protect the lamps. To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR. – Technical Information — Note: Suitable for Merten MET transformers. ˜

Version

Art. no.

20-630 W

MEG5137-0000

PU PG 1/72 8

Info new

www.merten.com

Art. no. MEG5133-0000

PU PG 1/72 8

Rotary dimmer insert for capacitive load

To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR. – Technical Information Version

Info new

˜

˜

40-600 W/VA

PU PG 1/72 8

AC 230 V, 50 Hz For electronic transformers and incandescent lamps (ohmic load). (Phase alignment). With pressure-operated two-way switch. Noise-free, short-circuit-proof, with overload protection, and soft start function to protect the lamps.

˜

Art. no.

MEG5135-0000

Rotary dimmer insert for capacitive load

AC 230 V, 50 Hz For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. (Phase control). With pressure-operated two-way switch.

Version

D

Nominal power: 60-1000 VA Motor load: 60-600 VA Neutral conductor:required

˜

40-400 W

Dimmer system

©2010

| Rotary dimmers | DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

349


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS Electronic potentiometer insert 1-10 V

Central plate with rotary knob For System Design.

AC 230 V, 50 Hz For fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast or electronic transformer with 1-10 V interface. With pressure-operated on/off switch 1.7 A.

Dimmer system

D

To be completed with: Central plate with rotary knob, MEG525003../-04../-06.. System M, MEG5250-40../-41../-41.. System Design. Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA, 5726.. OCTOCOLOR. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no. MEG5142-0000

PU PG 1/72 8

˜

Info new

To be completed with: Universal rotary dimmer insert, MEG51380000, MEG5139-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for ohmic load with pressure-operated on/off switch, MEG5131-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for ohmic load with pressure-operated two-way switch, MEG5132-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for inductive load, MEG5133-0000, MEG5135-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for capacitive load, MEG5136-0000, MEG5137-0000. Electronic potentiometer insert 1-10 V, MEG5142-0000.

Version

Central plate with rotary knob

To be completed with: Universal rotary dimmer insert, MEG51380000, MEG5139-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for ohmic load with pressure-operated on/off switch, MEG5131-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for ohmic load with pressure-operated two-way switch, MEG5132-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for inductive load, MEG5133-0000, MEG5135-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for capacitive load, MEG5136-0000, MEG5137-0000. Electronic potentiometer insert 1-10 V, MEG5142-0000.

Version ˜

MEG5250-0344 MEG5250-0319 MEG5250-0325

5/120 8 5/120 8 5/120 8

new new new

MEG5250-0444 MEG5250-0419 MEG5250-0414 MEG5250-0460

5/120 5/120 5/120 5/120

8 8 8 8

new new new new

MEG5250-0644 MEG5250-0619

5/120 8 5/120 8

new new

MEG5250-4143 MEG5250-4146

MEG5250-4244 MEG5250-4219

˜

˜

˜

5/120 8 5/120 8

new new

5/120 8 5/120 8

Art. no.

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant 572644 572619

10/120 8 10/120 8

572642 572605

5/120 8 5/120 8

metallic

bronze metallic titanium

www.merten.com

new new new new new

new new

To be completed with: Universal rotary dimmer insert, MEG51380000, MEG5139-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for ohmic load with pressure-operated on/off switch, MEG5131-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for ohmic load with pressure-operated two-way switch, MEG5132-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for inductive load, MEG5133-0000, MEG5135-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for capacitive load, MEG5136-0000, MEG5137-0000. Electronic potentiometer insert 1-10 V, MEG5142-0000. To be completed with: Dimmer insert, art. no. 572199, 572499, 572299, 572599, 577199, 572999, 573299.

white polar white

DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS | Rotary dimmers | ©2010

8 8 8 8 8

For OCTOCOLOR.

Version

350

10/120 5/120 5/120 5/120 5/120

Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant

white polar white

MEG5250-4019 MEG5250-4029 MEG5250-4015 MEG5250-4069 MEG5250-4060

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant

white polar white

Info

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

˜

Info

metallic

antique brass stainless steel

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium

For System M.

˜

˜

Art. no.

Info


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

Rotary dimmer inserts for 600 VA

ET dimmer insert for capacitive load

• Surface-mounted visible installation possible in conjunction with surface-mounted housing. • The following applies to all types of dimmers: If the dimmers cannot dissipate sufficient heat (cavity walls, multiple combinations, surface-mounted combinations and built-in dimmers on DIN rails), the connected loads specified may not be exploited to the maximum.

AC 230 V For electronic transformers (MET and other brands) and incandescent lamps (ohmic load). With pressure-operated two-way switch. (Phase alignment) Noise-free, short-circuit-proof, with overload protection, and soft start function to protect the lamps.

Technical Information: Dimmer basics; Dimmer and load types

To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts, art. no. System M 5670.., 5699..,5399.., System Basis 5723.., System Design 5720.., OCTOCOLOR 5726... – Technical Information

AC 230 V For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. With pressure-operated one-way switch. (Phase control).

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

20-315 W

577199

1/50 8.5

Art. no.

PU PG 1/50 8.5

To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts, art. no. System M 5670.., 5699..,5399.., System Basis 5723.., System Design 5720.., OCTOCOLOR 5726... – Technical Information ˜

Info disc.

Dimmer insert for ohmic load

Version

Art. no.

PU PG 1/72 8 1/72 8.5

Info disc. disc.

To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts, art. no. System M 5670.., 5699..,5399.., System Basis 5723.., System Design 5720.., OCTOCOLOR 5726... Accessories: Base load, art. no. 542894. – Technical Information ˜

AC 230 V For dimmable, wound transformers and incandescent lamps (inductive/ohmic load). With pressure-operated two-way switch. (Phase control).

Version

Art. no.

25-600 VA

573299

PU PG 1/72 8.5

disc.

Consists of 4 x 6 watt resistors. 1 set required per dimmer and per power booster in parallel connection (can be replaced by a 25 watt incandescent lamp).

Info disc.

Info

Version

Art. no. 542894

PU PG 1/48 8

Info disc. www.merten.com

Art. no. 572599

PU PG 1/50 8

Base load

To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts, art. no. System M 5670.., 5699..,5399.., System Basis 5723.., System Design 5720.., OCTOCOLOR 5726... – Technical Information ˜

Version

disc.

Connected load: 600 W incandescent lamps, 500 W halogen lamps, 500 VA dimmable, wound transformers

LV halogen dimmer insert for inductive load

20-500 VA

Info

Dimmer insert for inductive load

To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts, art. no. System M 5670.., 5699..,5399.., System Basis 5723.., System Design 5720.., OCTOCOLOR 5726... – Technical Information 572499 572299

PU PG 1/50 8

AC 230 V For dimmable wound transformers, motors, incandescent lamps and fluorescent lamps (inductive/ohmic load). With pressure-operated two-way switch and additional switch contact. (Phase control). In conjunction with the base load of the speed controller, this can be used as a dimmer for argon fluorescent lamps (Ø 38 mm) and as a dimmer in circuits with automatic mains disconnection.

˜

Version

Art. no. 572999

AC 230 V For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. With pressure-operated two-way switch. (Phase control).

60-400 W 60-600 W, halogen 500 W

disc.

For fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast or electronic transformer with 1-10 V interface. With pressure-operated one-way switch 5 A.

To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts, art. no. System M 5670.., 5699..,5399.., System Basis 5723.., System Design 5720.., OCTOCOLOR 5726... – Technical Information 572199

Info

Electronic potentiometer insert 1-10 V

˜

Version

D

˜

Dimmer insert for ohmic load

60-400 W

Dimmer system

©2010

| Rotary dimmer inserts for 600 VA | DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

351


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

Dimmer system

˜

D

Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA

Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA

For System M.

For OCTOCOLOR.

To be completed with: Dimmer insert, art. no. 572199, 572499, 572299, 572599, 577199, 572999, 573299.

Version ˜

Art. no.

567044 567019 567025

5/120 8 5/120 8 5/120 8

disc. disc. disc.

5/120 5/120 5/120 5/120

disc. disc. disc. disc.

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

PU PG

˜

569944 569919 569914 569960

8 8 8 8

white polar white

539944 539919

Version ˜

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant 5/120 8 5/120 8

disc. disc.

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white ˜

Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 600 VA

To be completed with: Universal rotary dimmer insert, MEG51380000, MEG5139-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for ohmic load with pressure-operated on/off switch, MEG5131-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for ohmic load with pressure-operated two-way switch, MEG5132-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for inductive load, MEG5133-0000, MEG5135-0000. Rotary dimmer insert for capacitive load, MEG5136-0000, MEG5137-0000. Electronic potentiometer insert 1-10 V, MEG5142-0000. To be completed with: Dimmer insert, art. no. 572199, 572499, 572299, 572599, 577199, 572999, 573299.

572644 572619

10/120 8 10/120 8

572642 572605

5/120 8 5/120 8

metallic

bronze metallic titanium

For System Design. Rotary dimmer up to 900 VA ˜

To be completed with: Dimmer insert, art. no. 572199, 572499, 572299, 572599, 577199, 572999, 573299.

Version ˜

Info

572019 572029 572015 572069 572060

10/120 5/120 5/120 5/120 5/120

8 8 8 8 8

disc. disc. disc. disc. disc.

5/120 8 5/120 8

disc. disc.

Technical Information: Dimmer basics; Dimmer and load types

metallic

antique brass stainless steel ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium ˜

Art. no.

• Surface-mounted visible installation possible in conjunction with surface-mounted housing. • The following applies to all types of dimmers: If the dimmers cannot dissipate sufficient heat (cavity walls, multiple combinations, surface-mounted combinations and built-in dimmers on DIN rails), the connected loads specified may not be exploited to the maximum.

572043 572046

Dimmer insert 900 W for ohmic load

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant

white polar white

572094 572099

5/120 8 5/120 8

AC 230 V For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. With pressure-operated two-way switch. (Phase control).

disc. disc.

To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 1000 VA, art. no. System Design 5717.., OCTOCOLOR 5715... – Technical Information — Note: Not to be combined with System Basis or System M.

www.merten.com

˜

352

DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS | Rotary dimmer up to 900 VA | ©2010

Version

Art. no.

75-900 W/halogen 700 W

572799

PU PG 1/30 8

Info disc.


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 1000 VA

Push-button module, 2-gang For System M. Push-button module without rockers. The push-button module is inserted onto the 2gang universal dimmer insert (art. no. 568099), and is used together with the rockers for the 2gang push-button module in the matching design.

For System Design.

˜

To be completed with: Dimmer insert, 900 W, for ohmic load, art. no. 572799.

Version ˜

Art. no.

˜

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium ˜

PU PG

571744 571719 571729 571715 571769 571760

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

8 8 8 8 8 8

disc. disc. disc. disc. disc. disc.

571743

1/100 8

disc.

571746

1/100 8

disc.

Version

Art. no. 568499

For OCTOCOLOR.

To be completed with: Push-button module, 2-gang, art. no. System M 568499. In KNX, to be completed with: KNX push-button module, 2-gang, art. no. System M 625299. Accessories: Protective hood for plaster, System M, art. no. 627591...

Version ˜

Version ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white

571544 571519

1/100 8 1/100 8

disc. disc.

Info

For System M. The rockers are attached to the 2-gang push-button module. ˜

To be completed with: Dimmer insert, 900 W, for ohmic load, art. no. 572799.

PU PG 1/100 8

Rockers for 2-gang push-button module

Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts up to 1000 VA

˜

D

To be completed with: Universal dimmer insert, 2-gang, art. no. 568099. Rockers for 2-gang push-button module, art. no. System M 6192.., 6252...

metallic

varnished antique brass varnished stainless steel

Dimmer system

Art. no.

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

PU PG

619244 619219 619225

1/150 9 1/150 9 1/150 9

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium

625244 625219 625214 625260

1/150 1/150 1/150 1/150

9 9 9 9

Push-button module, 2-gang For System Design Push-button module without rockers. The push-button module is inserted onto the 2gang universal dimmer insert (art. no. 568099), and is used together with the rockers for the 2gang push-button module in the matching design.

Double touch dimmer

Universal dimmer insert, 2-gang AC 230 V, 50-60 Hz For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads, e.g. incandescent lamps, dimmable wound transformers and electronic transformers. (Phase control or phase alignment). The universal dimmer automatically recognises the connected load. Do not connect any mixed loads. With memory function, can be switched off.

˜

To be completed with: Universal dimmer insert, 2-gang, art. no. 568099. Rockers for 2-gang push-button module, art. no. System Design 6262...

Version

Art. no. 568199

PU PG

Info

1/100 8

Neutral conductor:not required (2 conductor system) Nominal power/per channel: 50-200 W/VA To be completed with: Push-button module, 2-gang, art. no. System M 568499, System Design 568199. Rockers for 2-gang pushbutton module, art. no. System M 6192.., 6252.., System Design 6262... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information ˜

Art. no. 568099

PU PG

Info

1/50 8 www.merten.com

Version 2 x 50-200 VA

©2010

| Double touch dimmer | DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

353


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

Dimmer system

˜

D

Rockers for 2-gang push-button module

Memory super dimmer insert for ohmic load

For System Design. The rockers are attached to the 2-gang push-button module.

AC 230 V For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. (Phase control) With memory function, can be switched off.

To be completed with: Push-button module, 2-gang, art. no. System Design 568199. In KNX, to be completed with: KNX push-button module, 2-gang, System Design 626299. Accessories: Protective hood for plaster, System Design, art. no. 628091...

Version ˜

Info

626244 626219 626260

1/150 9 1/150 9 1/150 9

626246

1/150 9

metallic

varnished stainless steel

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white aluminium ˜

Art. no.

Art. no. 573399 577299

PU PG

Info

1/60 8 1/60 8

Memory halogen super dimmer insert for inductive load

• Memory: When the light is switched on, it has the last set brightness level. • Interference immunity in line with VDE 0639.

AC 230 V For dimmable, wound transformers and incandescent lamps (inductive/ohmic load). (Phase control) With memory function, can be switched off.

Technical Information: Dimmer basics; Dimmer and load types; Sensor cover functions and device overview; TRANCENT functions and device overview

AC 230 V For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads, e.g. incandescent lamps, dimmable wound transformers or electronic transformers. Phase control or phase alignment The universal dimmer automatically recognises the connected load. Do not connect any mixed loads. With memory function, can be switched off.

To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information

Neutral conductor: not required (2 conductor system)

Version

Art. no.

20-500 VA

573599

To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Central plate comfort rotating regulator for Universal super dimmer insert, art. no. System M 5678.., 5677... In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT sensor cover for dimmer inserts art. No. System M 5036.., 5026..., System Design 5046... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information — Note: The insert from version 3A only can be used in conjunction with the CONNECT radio system. ˜

www.merten.com

Version 60-400 W 60-600 W, halogen 500 W

Button dimmer

Universal super dimmer insert

354

To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

25-420 VA

577099

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS | Button dimmer | ©2010

˜

PU PG 1/60 8

Info


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS Memory ET super dimmer insert for capacitive load

Electronic push-button insert AC 230 V Pulse generator for surge switches or protective circuits. The switching function is determined by the surge switch or protective circuit used.

AC 230 V For electronic transformers (MET and other brands) and incandescent lamps (ohmic load). (Phase alignment) Noise-free, short-circuit-proof, with overload protection, and soft start function to protect the lamps. With memory function, can be switched off. To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With universal relay insert, art. no. 575897, with preset push-button function. – Technical Information Version

Art. no. 577899

PU PG

Info

1/60 8

D

Connected load: 4-100 VA Switching current: 10-500 mA Pulse duration: approx. 40 ms Neutral conductor: not required (2 conductor system)

˜

20-315 W

Dimmer system

To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

4-100 VA

574697

PU PG

Info

1/60 8

Relay universal insert Contact switch –

AC 230 V For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads such as incandescent lamps, energy-saving lamps, LV halogen lighting with conventional transformer, electronic transformers, fluorescent lamps. Neutral conductor required. Functions: • Push-button function: switched on as long as the push-button is touched, max. 1 minute • Switching function: ON/OFF • Time function: 5 s to 1 h

Technical Information: Sensor cover functions and device overview; TRANCENT functions and device overview

Electronic switch insert AC 230 V For ohmic load such as incandescent lamps, 230 V halogen lamps. Switching capacity: 25-400 W Neutral conductor: not required (2 conductor system) To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.. or TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information — Note: The electronic switch insert, cannot be used in conjunction with the CONNECT radio system.

Connected load: max. 1000 W/VA, 500 VA for LV halogen lamps with conventional transformer, max. 140 µF capacitive load

˜

Art. no.

25-400 W

575799

PU PG

Info

Version

Art. no.

max. 1000 W/VA

575897

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

1/50 8

www.merten.com

Version

To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information ˜

©2010

| Contact switch | DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

355


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS Electronic switch insert AC 230 V For ohmic load such as incandescent lamps, 230 V halogen lamps.

Extension inserts –

Technical Information: Sensor cover functions and device overview

Switching capacity: 40-300 W Neutral conductor: not required (2 conductor system)

Dimmer system

D

To be completed with: ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5755.., 5784.., System Basis 5782.., System Design 5786.., OCTOCOLOR 5753.., AQUADESIGN 5781... ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module with switch, art. no. System M 5728.., 5785.., System Basis 5783.., System Design 5795.., OCTOCOLOR 5756... ARGUS 180/2.20 m flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5688.., 5687... In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT sensor cover for switch inserts art. no. System M 5034.., 5024..., System Design 5044... – Technical Information — Note: A maximum of two electronic switch inserts may be wired in parallel. The insert from version 2A only can be used in conjunction with the CONNECT radio system.

Extension insert For memory super, halogen super and TELE dimmer, electronic push-button, time switch, relay switch and MET transformers. The extension unit cannot be controlled remotely. Operated as with main unit.

˜

Version

Art. no.

40-300 W

576799

PU PG

To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Relay switch insert

To be completed with: ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5755.., 5784.., System Basis 5782.., System Design 5786.., OCTOCOLOR 5753.., AQUADESIGN 5781... ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module with switch, art. no. System M 5728.., 5785.., System Basis 5783.., System Design 5795.., OCTOCOLOR 5756... ARGUS 180/2.20 m flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5688.., 5687... In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT sensor cover for switch inserts art. no. System M 5034.., 5024..., System Design 5044... – Technical Information — Note: Replace the relay switch insert, art. no. 576899. ˜

Art. no. 576897

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

www.merten.com

Version 0-1000 VA

356

DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS | Extension inserts | ©2010

Info

For memory super, halogen super and TELE dimmer, electronic push-button, time switch, relay switch and MET transformers. Neutral conductor required. Can be remote controlled. Operated as with main unit.

1/50 8

Switching capacity: 0-1000 VA Capacitive load: max. 140 µF Neutral conductor: required (3 conductor system)

PU PG 1/60 8

Extension TELE insert

Info

AC 230 V For ohmic and complex loads such as incandescent lamps, fluorescent lamps, energy-saving lamps, LV halogen lighting etc.

Art. no. 573999

To be completed with: TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no. 573998

PU PG 1/60 8

Info


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

Touch sensor surfaces (switching/dimming)

Sensor cover

Technical Information: Electronic/relay switch

For OCTOCOLOR. Manual operation.

Sensor cover

Dimmer system

For System M. Manual operation. With short-stroke key. To be completed with: Super dimmer insert, art. no. 577099, 573399, 577299, 573599, 577899. Electronic switch insert, art. no. 575799, 574697. Universal relay insert, art. no. 575897. Extension insert, art. no. 573999. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

To be completed with: Super dimmer insert, art. no. 577099, 573399, 577299, 573599, 577899. Electronic switch insert, art. no. 575799, 574697. Universal relay insert, art. no. 575897. Extension insert, art. no. 573999. – Technical Information ˜

PU PG

Info

Version ˜

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

577644 577619 577625

˜

570144 570119 570114 570160

574244 574219

1/100 8 1/100 8

574242 574205

1/100 8 1/100 8

Sensor cover

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium

Info

metallic

bronze metallic titanium

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white ˜

˜

Art. no.

D

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

For AQUADESIGN. Manual operation. With short-stroke key.

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant

white polar white

570444 570419

1/100 8 1/100 8

To be completed with: Super dimmer insert, art. no. 577099, 573399, 577299, 573599, 577899. Electronic switch insert, art. no. 575799, 574697. Universal relay insert, art. no. 575897. Extension insert, art. no. 573999. – Technical Information ˜

Sensor cover For System Design. Manual operation. With short-stroke key.

To be completed with: Super dimmer insert, art. no. 577099, 573399, 577299, 573599, 577899. Electronic switch insert, art. no. 575799, 574697. Universal relay insert, art. no. 575897. Extension insert, art. no. 573999. – Technical Information ˜

˜

PU PG

573744 573719 573729 573715 573769 573760

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

573743 573746

1/100 8 1/100 8

Info

8 8 8 8 8

For System M. Can be manually operated and controlled remotely via IR remote control. With short-stroke key.

8 8 8 8 8 8

To be completed with: Super dimmer insert, art. no. 577099, 573399, 577299, 573599, 577899. Electronic switch insert, art. no. 575799, 574697. Universal relay insert, art. no. 575897. Extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. Transmitter: IR remote control Distance, art. no. 570222. – Technical Information ˜

metallic

antique brass stainless steel

PU PG 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

TELE sensor cover

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium ˜

Art. no.

Art. no. 573844 573819 573815 573814 573860

Version ˜

577944 577919 577925

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

570344 570319 570314 570360

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant

white polar white

©2010

Info

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

571144 571119

1/100 8 1/100 8

| Touch sensor surfaces (switching/dimming) | DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

www.merten.com

Version

Version white polar white dark brazil anthracite aluminium

357


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS TELE sensor cover

CONNECT radio sensor cover for dimmer inserts

For System Design. Can be manually operated and controlled remotely via IR remote control. With short-stroke key.

Dimmer system

For System M. Operator button to toggle or switch/dim an output. Manual operation and remote control possible via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. Radio features: Router

To be completed with: Super dimmer insert, art. no. 577099, 573399, 577299, 573599, 577899. Electronic switch insert, art. no. 575799, 574697. Universal relay insert, art. no. 575897. Extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. Transmitter: IR remote control Distance, art. no. 570222. – Technical Information ˜

D

Version ˜

Art. no.

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium ˜

PU PG

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on (to memory value), switch off, dim With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally adjustable dimming speed, staircase lighting function, master/slave, brightness limit, switch on to brightness limit, memory function that can be switched off

570944 570919 570929 570915 570969 570960

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

8 8 8 8 8 8

570943 570946

1/100 8 1/100 8

˜

Version

metallic

antique brass stainless steel

˜

˜

For OCTOCOLOR. Can be manually operated and controlled remotely via IR remote control.

˜

To be completed with: Super dimmer insert, art. no. 577099, 573399, 577299, 573599, 577899. Electronic switch insert, art. no. 575799, 574697. Universal relay insert, art. no. 575897. Extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. Transmitter: IR remote control Distance, art. no. 570222. – Technical Information

˜

574944 574919

1/100 8 1/100 8

574942 574905

1/100 8 1/100 8

503644 503619 503625

502644 502619 502614 502660

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

8 8 8 8

CONNECT radio sensor cover for dimmer inserts For System Design. Operator button to toggle or switch/dim an output. Manual operation and remote control possible via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. Radio features: Router

Info

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on (to memory value), switch off, dim With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally adjustable dimming speed, staircase lighting function, master/slave, brightness limit, switch on to brightness limit, memory function that can be switched off ˜

To be completed with: Universal super dimmer insert, art. no. 577099 from version 3A. Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

Version ˜

˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white aluminium

504644 504619 504660

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

504646

1/100 8

metallic

www.merten.com

varnished stainless steel

358

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

metallic

bronze metallic titanium

Info

Thermoplastic classy matt

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white ˜

PU PG

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white anthracite aluminium

˜

Art. no.

Art. no.

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy

TELE sensor cover

Version

To be completed with: Universal super dimmer insert, art. no. 577099 from version 3A. Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS | Touch sensor surfaces (switching/dimming) | ©2010

Info


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS CONNECT radio sensor cover, for switch inserts For System M. Operator button for switching an output. Manual operation and remote control possible via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. Radio features: Router

Power boosters –

Technical Information: Dimmer basics; Dimmer and load types

Power booster AC 230 V For power extension of memory super dimmers, TELE dimmers, incandescent and fluorescent lamp dimmers. The load must be evenly distributed across dimmers and power boosters. (Phase control).

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Toggle With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally staircase lighting function, ON/ OFF delay, master/slave ˜

To be completed with: Relay switch insert, art. no. 576897. Electronic switch insert, art. no. 576799 from version 2A. Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

Version ˜

Art. no.

503444 503419 503425

502444 502419 502414 502460

To be completed with: Blanking cover, art. no. System M 3916.., 3918.., 3917.., System Basis 3920.., System Design 3919.., OCTOCOLOR 3926... Blanking cover AQUADESIGN, art. no. 3483... – Technical Information Version

Art. no.

25-600 VA

574099

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

8 8 8 8

For System Design. Operator button for switching an output. Manual operation and remote control possible via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. Radio features: Router

To be completed with: Blanking cover, art. no. System M 3916.., 3918.., 3917.., System Basis 3920.., System Design 3919.., OCTOCOLOR 3926... Blanking cover AQUADESIGN, art. no. 3483... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

20-315 W

577399

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Toggle With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally staircase lighting function, ON/ OFF delay, master/slave

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white aluminium ˜

504444 504419 504460

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

504446

1/100 8

Info

Info

AC 230 V For power extension of memory super dimmers, TELE dimmers, incandescent and fluorescent lamp dimmers. The load must be evenly distributed across dimmers and power boosters. (Phase control). –

Technical Information

Version

Art. no.

25-500 VA, light grey

574029

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

metallic

varnished stainless steel

www.merten.com

˜

PU PG

PU PG 1/60 8

Built-in power booster

To be completed with: Relay switch insert, art. no. 576897. Electronic switch insert, art. no. 576799 from version 2A. Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system. Art. no.

Info

AC 230 V For power extension of ET dimmers (art. no. 577199) or ET super dimmers (art. no. 577899). The load must be evenly distributed across the ET dimmer and the ET power booster. (Phase alignment).

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

Version

PU PG 1/60 8

ET power booster for capacitive load

CONNECT radio sensor cover, for switch inserts

˜

D

˜

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

PU PG

Dimmer system

©2010

| Power boosters | DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

359


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS Surface-mounted dimmer for ohmic load

Control units 1-10 V

Control unit 1-10 V

AC 230 V For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. With pressure-operated two-way switch. (Phase control). Closed base.

AC 230 V For controlling electronic ballasts and system compatible devices with 1-10 V interface. Soft start function to protect the lamps. Memory function that can be switched off.

Dimmer system

D

Switch contact: for switching the electronic ballasts/transformers etc. Nominal current:10 A, cos = 0,5 Capacitive load: AC 230 V, max. 140 µF 1-10V interface: for dimming the electronic ballasts/transformers etc. Voltage range: DC 1-10 V Output current: max. 100 mA Dimensions: 180 x 34 x 49 mm (WxHxD) Diagonal size: 55 mm Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons (make contact). With max. 10 extension inserts, art. no. 573999, extension TELE inserts, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white

577794

1/40 8.1

– —

Technical Information Contents: Complete device with cable and mini-trunking entry (15 mm).

Version

Art. no.

60-600 W, halogen 500 W, polar white 60-600 W, halogen 500 W, dark brazil 60-600 W, halogen 500 W, white

571619

1/72 8

disc.

571617

1/72 8

disc.

571644

1/72 8

disc.

DIN rail mounted rotary dimmers

For fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast or electronic transformer with 1-10 V interface. With pressure-operated one-way switch 5 A.

• For installation in the distribution board on 35 mm DIN rail in accordance with DIN EN 50022. • Device width: 35 mm = 3 modules. • Interference immunity in line with VDE 0639. –

Technical Information: Dimmer basics

To be completed with: Central plate for rotary dimmer inserts, art. no. System M 5670.., 5699..,5399.., System Basis 5723.., System Design 5720.., OCTOCOLOR 5726... – Technical Information ˜

Art. no. 572999

PU PG 1/50 8

Built-in dimmer for ohmic load AC 230 V For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. With pressure-operated two-way switch. (Phase control).

Info disc.

Rotary dimmers –

Info

Info

Electronic potentiometer insert 1-10 V

Version

PU PG

Technical Information: Dimmer basics; Dimmer and load types

Technical Information

Version

Art. no.

60-500 W, light grey

571829

Info

Built-in LV halogen dimmer for inductive load

Surface-mounted dimmer for ohmic load

AC 230 V For dimmable, wound transformers and incandescent lamps (inductive/ohmic load). With pressure-operated two-way switch. (Phase control).

AC 230 V For incandescent lamps and 230 V halogen lamps. With pressure-operated two-way switch. (Phase control). Closed base. –

Technical Information — Contents: Complete device with cable and mini-trunking entry (15 mm).

PU PG 1/72 8

Technical Information

www.merten.com

360

Version

Art. no.

60-400 W, polar white 60-400 W, dark brazil 60-400 W, white

573419

1/72 8

PU PG

disc.

Info

573417 573444

1/72 8 1/72 8

disc. disc.

DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS | Control units 1-10 V | ©2010

Version

Art. no.

20-500 VA, light grey

572529

PU PG 1/72 8

Info


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

Built-in ET dimmer for capacitive load

Universal dimmer REG/2x230/ 300 W

AC 230 V For electronic transformers (MET and other brands) and incandescent lamps (ohmic load). With pressure-operated two-way switch. (Phase alignment) Noise-free, short-circuit-proof, with overload protection, and soft start function to protect the lamps.

AC 230 V, 50-60 Hz For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads, e.g. incandescent lamps, dimmable wound transformers and electronic transformers. (Phase control or phase alignment). The universal dimmer automatically recognises the connected load. Combinations of ohmic and inductive, or ohmic and capacitive loads can also be connected. Combinations of inductive and capacitive loads cannot be connected. With short-circuit, open-circuit and excess temperature protection with soft start lamp protection. Manual operation and extension unit operation. For installation onto DIN rails EN 50022. With memory function, can be switched off.

Technical Information

Version

Art. no.

20-280 W, light grey

577129

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

Technical Information: Dimmer basics; Dimmer and load types; Lamps/dimmer matrix

Universal dimmer REG/230/ 500 W AC 230 V, 50-60 Hz For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads, e.g. incandescent lamps, dimmable wound transformers and electronic transformers. (Phase control or phase alignment). The universal dimmer automatically recognises the connected load. Combinations of ohmic and inductive, or ohmic and capacitive loads can also be connected. Combinations of inductive and capacitive loads cannot be connected. With short-circuit, open-circuit and excess temperature protection with soft start lamp protection. Manual operation and extension unit operation. For installation onto DIN rails EN 50022. With memory function, can be switched off.

Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons (make contact). With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

light grey

571930

Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons (make contact). With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information PU PG

Nominal voltage: AC 220 - 230 V, 50/60 Hz Nominal power/channel: max. 150 W/VA 25 W minimum load (ohmic) 50 VA minimum load (ohmic/inductive/capacitive) Input (extension unit operation): AC 230 V, 50/ 60 Hz (same phase as the dimming channel) Device width: 6 modules = approx. 105 mm

Info

1/10 8

Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons (make contact). With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

light grey

571915

PU PG

Info

1/10 8

www.merten.com

Art. no. 571950

Info

AC 230 V, 50-60 Hz For ohmic, inductive and capacitive loads, e.g. incandescent lamps, dimmable wound transformers and electronic transformers. (Phase control or phase alignment). The universal dimmer automatically recognises the connected load. Combinations of ohmic and inductive, or ohmic and capacitive loads can also be connected. Combinations of inductive and capacitive loads cannot be connected. With short-circuit, open-circuit and excess temperature protection with soft start lamp protection. Manual operation and extension unit operation. For installation onto DIN rails EN 50022. With memory function, can be switched off.

˜

Version

PU PG 1/10 8

Universal dimmer REG/4x230/ 150 W

Nominal voltage: AC 220 - 230 V, 50/60 Hz Nominal power: max. 500 W/VA 25 W minimum load (ohmic) 50 VA minimum load (ohmic/inductive/capacitive) Input (extension unit operation): AC 230 V, 50/ 60 Hz (same phase as the dimming channel) Device width: 4 modules = approx. 72 mm

light grey

D

Nominal voltage: AC 220 - 230 V, 50/60 Hz Nominal power/channel: max. 300 W/VA 25 W minimum load (ohmic) 50 VA minimum load (ohmic/inductive/capacitive) Input (extension unit operation): AC 230 V, 50/ 60 Hz (same phase as the dimming channel) Device width: 4 modules = approx. 72 mm

DIN rail mounted dimmers –

Dimmer system

©2010

| DIN rail mounted dimmers | DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

361


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

Dimmer system

D –

DIN rail mounted memory super dimmers

Remote controls

• Memory: When the light is switched on, it has the last set brightness level. • For installation in the distribution board on 35 mm DIN rail in accordance with DIN EN 50022. • Device width: 35 mm = 3 modules. • Interference immunity in line with VDE 0639.

• IR remote controls can be combined with TELE sensor covers from all ranges.

IR remote control Distance 2010 10 channel IR remote control. For the control of all TELE sensor covers, blind push-buttons with IR receiver, presence detectors with IR receivers and KNX devices with IR receivers.

Technical Information: Dimmer basics

Built-in memory halogen super dimmer for inductive load AC 230 V For dimmable, wound transformers and incandescent lamps (inductive/ohmic load). (Phase control) With memory function, can be switched off.

Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

20-500 VA, light grey

573529

PU PG

Battery: 2 microcells (IEC LR 03, AAA) Range: up to 20 m Receiver: TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... Blind push-button with IR receiver and sensor connection, art. no. System M 5880.., 5864.., System Basis 5804..,System Design 5844.., OCTOCOLOR 5824... ARGUS Presence with IR receiver, art. no. 550591, 6309... Push-button, 4-gang plus with IR receiver, art. no. System M 6175.., 6279... — Contents: Without battery. ˜

Version

Art. no.

black

570222

Info

1/50 8

Built-in memory ET super dimmer for capacitive load AC 230 V For electronic transformers (MET and other brands) and incandescent lamps (ohmic load). (Phase alignment) Noise-free, short-circuit-proof, with overload protection, and soft start function to protect the lamps. With memory function, can be switched off. Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons. With universal relay insert, art. no. 575897, with preset push-button function. – Technical Information ˜

Art. no. 577829

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

www.merten.com

Version 20-280 W, light grey

362

DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS | DIN rail mounted memory super dimmers | ©2010

PU PG 1/48 8

Info


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS CONNECT radio universal remote control Radio remote control and IR remote control in a single device. For activating: • Devices of the Merten CONNECT radio system • Merten IR devices • Up to five IR AV devices such as TV, DVD, DVDR, VCR, SAT, cable, AMP and DMR In connection with the CONNECT radio system, several rooms can be set up with radio components using the remote control. Each room can be configured with up to 9 groups with maximum 12 devices and 3 scenes with maximum 12 devices. Radio features: System administrator, transmitter Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on, switch off, toggle, dim, raise/lower roller shutters, scene • Programming in EASY CONNECT as a system administrator • Individual programming of CONNECT radio push-buttons • Individual description of rooms and groups • Display of description in LCD display With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally graphic programming of the EASY CONNECT functions Extended functions for IR/AV: • Trigger Philips Ambilight • Supports more than 1,000 manufacturers. Devices are selected from a list or by entering programming codes. • General use of the functions of a device (e.g. volume) in all modes.

Electronic transformers/low voltage halogen systems MET B –

Electronic transformer 105 W

Receiver: All receivers of the Merten CONNECT radio system. — Note: The device can assume the properties of a system administrator. The remote control must be used as the system administrator in connection with the EASY CONNECT method. In connection with the CONNECT radio configurator, it can be used as required. Contents: With battery.With a codes table for nearly all conventional devices, like TV, VCR, DVD, SAT, AUX, ... Art. no. 506923

PU PG

D

Output voltage: AC 12 V Protection class: II Cable length: max. 2 m in secondary circuit (in line with VDE) Colour: Polar white Dimensions: 180 x 34 x 49 mm (WxHxD) Diagonal size: 55 mm –

Technical Information

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

35-105 W, polar white

577796

1/40 8.1

Info

Electronic transformer 200 W AC 230 V Dimmable with ET dimmer. (Phase alignment) No built-in fuse because short-circuit-proof in secondary circuit. With overload protection, soft start function. Output voltage: AC 12 V Protection class: II Cable length: max. 2 m in secondary circuit (in line with VDE) Colour: Polar white Dimensions: 213 x 46 x 50 mm (WxHxD) Diagonal size: 62 mm –

Technical Information

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

50-200 W, polar white

577791

1/24 8.1

Info

Info

1/6 8

www.merten.com

Version Aluminium/black

Dimmer system

AC 230 V Dimmable with ET dimmer. (Phase alignment). No built-in fuse because short-circuit-proof in secondary circuit. With overload protection, thermal protection, soft start function.

Radio range: up to 100 m in free field, up to 30 m indoors IR range: up to 15 m Battery: 3 microcells (IEC LR 03, AAA) Display element: LCD display with 10 characters ˜

Technical Information: MET B

©2010

| Electronic transformers/low voltage halogen systems MET B | DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

363


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS Electronic transformers/low voltage halogen systems MET D –

Technical Information: MET D

Dimmer system

D

Control inserts for MET D –

Technical Information: MET D

Electronic transformer with integrated dimmer 105 W

Push-button insert make contact 1 pole

AC 230 V Electronic transformer with integrated phase alignment dimmer. A power extension is possible with electronic transformers, art. no. 577797, up to approx. 1700 W total connected load (in line with TAB). No built-in fuse because short-circuit-proof in secondary circuit. With overload protection, thermal protection, soft start function. The memory function can be switched off.

With claw and screw fixing.

Output voltage: AC 12 V Protection class: II Cable length: max. 2 m in secondary circuit (in line with VDE) Colour: Polar white Dimensions: 180 x 34 x 49 mm (WxHxD) Diagonal size: 55 mm

˜

Accessories: LED lighting module for switches/push-buttons 100-230 V, MEG3901-00... LED lighting module for switches/ push-buttons 8-32 V, MEG3921-00...

Version ˜

Extension unit operation: With mechanical push-buttons (make contact). With extension insert, art. no. 573999, extension TELE insert, art. no. 573998. – Technical Information Version

Art. no.

PU PG

577798

1/40 8.1

AC 230 V Electronic transformer, for power extension of MET D transformers with integrated dimmer (art. no. 577798) can be used. Dimmable with ET dimmer or electronic transformer with integrated dimmer. No built-in fuse because short-circuit-proof in secondary circuit. With overload protection, thermal protection, soft start function. Output voltage: AC 12 V Protection class: II Cable length: max. 2 m in secondary circuit (in line with VDE) Colour: Polar white Dimensions: 180 x 34 x 49 mm (WxHxD) Diagonal size: 55 mm

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

577797

1/40 8.1

10/60 1.8

new

10/60 1

new

MEG3050-0000

Double push-button insert twoway 1 pole With claw and screw fixing.

Version ˜

Info

Art. no.

˜

MEG3159-0000

Info

10/60 1

new

10/60 1

new

screw terminals with lift clamp

10 A, 250 V AC

MEG3059-0000

Push-button insert two-way 1 pole With claw and screw fixing.

˜

Accessories: LED lighting module for switches/push-buttons 100-230 V, MEG3901-00... LED lighting module for switches/ push-buttons 8-32 V, MEG3921-00...

Version ˜

˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC

MEG3156-0000

10/60 1

new

10/60 1

new

screw terminals with lift clamp MEG3056-0000

www.merten.com

10 A, 250 V AC

364

PU PG

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC

Technical Information

35-105 W, polar white

MEG3150-0000

Info

Electronic transformer for power extension 105 W

Info

screw terminals with lift clamp

10 A, 250 V AC

˜

35-105 W, polar white

PU PG

plug-in terminals

10 A, 250 V AC ˜

Art. no.

DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS | Electronic transformers/low voltage halogen systems MET D | ©2010


DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS Extension insert

Base load

For memory super, halogen super and TELE dimmer, electronic push-button, time switch, relay switch and MET transformers. The extension unit cannot be controlled remotely. Operated as with main unit.

Consists of 4 x 6 watt resistors. 1 set required per dimmer and per power booster in parallel connection (can be replaced by a 25 watt incandescent lamp). Version

Art. no.

To be completed with: Sensor cover, art. no. System M 5776.., 5701.., 5704.., System Basis 5741.., System Design 5737.., OCTOCOLOR 5742.., AQUADESIGN 5738... – Technical Information

542894

˜

Version

Art. no. 573999

PU PG

PU PG 1/48 8

Dimmer system

Info

D

disc.

Info

1/60 8

Extension TELE insert For memory super, halogen super and TELE dimmer, electronic push-button, time switch, relay switch and MET transformers. Neutral conductor required. Can be remote controlled. Operated as with main unit. To be completed with: TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... In the TRANCENT range with control electronics, 1-gang, art. no. 569090 and TRANCENT glass sensor covers, art. no. 5691.., 5692.., 5693.., 5695... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no. 573998

PU PG

Info

1/60 8

Accessories

Surge protection module AC 230 V, +6 % / -10 % For electronic transformers MET and ET dimmers. For protecting the transformer or dimmer during parallel operation of fluorescent lamps and other inductive loads with transformers. Connection parallel to the input side of the transformer or dimmer. 1 module for max. 10 transformers per circuit is recommended. Leakage current: (8/20) 4.5 kA (1x), 1 kA (100x) Residual voltage at discharge current: (1 kA) approx. 1000 V Version

Art. no. 552119

PU PG

Info

1/150 8

6-gang distribution board For secondary wiring of LV halogen lighting, with six double plug-in contacts (up to 2.5 mm2) and incoming cable to the secondary side of the transformer. Input voltage level Ueff  42 V Output currents leff  17 A for the input (approx. 200 W at 12 V) leff  8.5 A per junction box (approx. 100 W at 12 V) Art. no. 552019

PU PG

Info

1/60 8 www.merten.com

Version

©2010

| Accessories | DIMMER SYSTEM/TRANSFORMERS

365


Blind control system

INTELLIGENT CONTROL WITH HIGH COMFORT Blind control system

Blind control system

Central and group control

Blind time switch

The blind control system can be operated with just one push of a button for individual control as well as central/ group control. Sensors for sun and wind protection and twilight functions can also be incorporated for added convenience.

The inserts can be installed and interconnected to enable simple central or group control. Whether in private homes or at the office: the system ensures ease of operation.

Safety even when you're gone: the time switch, the random generator, and the switch from winter to summer time are just a few of the many additional functions that provide the utmost in safety and technology.

www.merten.de

Example: central and group control

366

Blind control system | Š2010


Blind control system

Contents

Blind control system

Blind time switch

www.merten.de

Blind push-button

Š2010

| Blind control system

367


BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM Blind control systemBlind control systemSystem electronicsBlind control systemBlind control systemC

Functions and device overview Function

Design cover

inserts

Blind control system

Blind control system

C

■■ For a blind/roller shutter motor with limit switch ■■ Individual control

■■ For a blind/roller shutter motor with limit switch ■■ Individual control ■■ Extension input for group/ central control ■■ Wind monitoring function can be implemented

580698

580699

Blind push-button

■■ Manual operation ■■ Slat adjustment ■■ Sun protection function

Blind push-button with sensor connection

■■ Manual operation ■■ Slat adjustment ■■ Sun protection function ■■ Memory function for automatic operation of drive at saved times

Blind push-button with memory function and sensor connection

■■ Manual operation ■■ Slat adjustment ■■ Sun protection function ■■ Can be remote controlled via infrared (remote control art. no. 570222)

Blind push-button with IR receiver and sensor connection

■■ Manual operation ■■ Sun protection function ■■ Can be remote-controlled via transmitters of the CONNECT radio system

CONNECT radio roller shutter pushbutton with sensor connection

System M System Design System Basis OCTOCOLOR

System M System Design System Basis OCTOCOLOR

System M System Design System Basis OCTOCOLOR

System M System Design System Basis OCTOCOLOR

System M System Design

Blind control insert with extension input

Sun/twilight sensor

(max. 1 motor 1000  VA); Neutral conductor required

(max. 1 motor 1000  VA); Neutral conductor required

Cable length 2 m

5877.., 5862.. 5842.. 5802.. 5822..

5878.., 5865.. 5845.. 5805.. 5825..

5879.., 5863.. 5843.. 5803.. 5823..

5880.., 5864.. 5844.. 5804.. 5824..

5035.., 5025.. 5045..

Blind time switch ■■ Manual operation ■■ Slat adjustment ■■ Clock function programmable with time block: Mon-Fri: (1 x raising, 1 x lowering time) Sat. - Sun. (1 x raising, 1 x lowering time)

Blind time switch standard

■■ Manual operation ■■ Slat adjustment ■■ Clock function for complex switching ranges ■■ Astro function for automatically adjusting switching times according to the time of the year ■■ Random function

Blind time switch

■■ Manual operation ■■ Slat adjustment ■■ Clock function for complex switching ranges ■■ Astro function for automatically adjusting switching times according to the time of the year ■■ Random function ■■ Sun protection/twilight functions

Blind time switch with sensor connection

System M System Design System Basis OCTOCOLOR

System M System Design System Basis OCTOCOLOR

System M System Design System Basis OCTOCOLOR

5814.., 5819.. 5859.. 5809.. 5839..

Extension input inoperable (no central/group control is possible)

5815.., 5861.. 5841.. 5801.. 5821..

5816.., 5867.. 5851.. 5811.. 5831..

Wind monitoring unit

www.merten.com www.merten.de

■■ The wind monitoring unit enables the blinds to be raised or lowered depending on the wind strength

368

©2010 BLIND control CONTROL system SYSTEM || ©2010 Blind

Wind sensor interface 580693 (with wind sensor 580690 or 580692)

580691

Standard blind control insert

Blind push-button ■■ Manual operation ■■ Slat adjustment

■■ Sensor for suction fixing on the window ■■ Brightness measurement

via extension input


BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM Multiple control relay insert for roller shutters

Blind control systemBlind control systemSystem electronicsBlind control systemBlind control systemC

Technical Information: Blind control system

5 A, AC 250 V Suitable for a size 60 flush-mounted box. With a multiple control relay, it is possible to control 2 motors locally by manual operation or centrally. The multiple control relays can be cascaded.

Inserts –

Technical Information: Blind control system functions and device overview

To be completed with: Blanking cover, art. no. System M 3916.., 3918.., 3917.., System Basis 3920.., System Design 3919.., OCTOCOLOR 3926... – Technical Information ˜

Standard blind control insert AC 230 V, 50 Hz For local control of a blind/roller shutter motor with limit switch. Motor protection through interlocked relay contacts. Without extension input.

Version

576399

Nominal voltage: AC 230 V, 50 Hz Neutral conductor:required Switching capacity: max. 1 motor 1000 VA Outputs: 2 make contacts (interlocked) Pulse duration: 2 minutes Connecting terminals: Screw terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2x1.5 mm2

Art. no. 580698

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

Nominal voltage: AC 230 V, 50 Hz Neutral conductor: required Switching capacity: max. 1 motor 1000 VA Outputs: 2 make contacts (interlocked) Reversing time: minimum 500 ms Connecting terminals: Screw terminals for max. 2.5 mm2 or 2x1.5 mm2

1/24 8

Mains voltage: AC 230 V, 50 Hz ±10 % Control voltage: AC 230 V ±10 % Power consumption: 10 mA in relay operation Switching voltage: max. AC 250 V Switching current: max. 6 A Temperature range: 0 -60 °C Terminals: max. 1.5 mm2 Dimensions: 22x49x52 mm (HxWxD) Installation: (deep) flush-mounted box

Blind control insert with extension input AC 230 V, 50 Hz For controlling a blind/roller shutter motor with limit switch. A mechanical roller shutter switch/push-button or an additional blind control insert can be connected via the extension input to implement group/central control. Wind alarm function possible with extension input. Motor protection through interlocked relay contacts.

C

Info

6 A, AC 250 V Suitable for a size 60 flush-mounted box. Flat 22 mm design. For local control using push-buttons, installation in a deep flush-mounted box. For controlling up to 2 roller shutter motors locally, in groups or centrally. With separation of load and control circuit, as well as forced locking in both directions of movement. Motors are controlled individually using a roller shutter rocker switch and centrally using the blind time switches or blind push-buttons of the Merten blind control system.

To be completed with: Blind push-buttons and blind time switches for the blind control system. In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT radio roller shutter push-button with sensor connection art. No. System M 5035.., 5025..., System Design 5045... – Technical Information Version

PU PG

Multiple control relay for roller shutters, flush-mounted

˜

1000 VA

Art. no.

Blind control system

To be completed with: Blanking cover, art. no. System M 3916.., 3918.., 3917.., System Basis 3920.., System Design 3919.., OCTOCOLOR 3926... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no. 576398

PU PG

Info

1/100 8

To be completed with: Blind push-buttons and blind time switches for the blind control system. In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT radio roller shutter push-button with sensor connection art. No. System M 5035.., 5025..., System Design 5045... Accessories: Wind sensor interface, art. no. 580693. – Technical Information — Note: In combination with the standard blind time switch, art. no. 5809.., 5859.., 5839.., 5819.., the extension input does not work. ˜

Art. no. 580699

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

www.merten.com

Version 1000 VA

©2010

| Inserts | BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM

369


BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM Multiple control relay for roller shutters REG 2 A, AC 250 V For installation on DIN rails. For controlling up to 2 roller shutter motors locally, in groups or centrally. With separation of load and control circuit, as well as forced locking in both directions of movement. Motors are controlled individually using a roller shutter rocker switch and centrally using the blind time switches or blind push-buttons of the Merten blind control system.

Blind control system

C

Mains voltage: AC 230 V, 50 Hz ±10 % Power consumption: 10 mA in relay operation Switching voltage: max. AC 250 V Switching current: max. 2 A Temperature range: 0 -60 °C Terminals: max. 1.5 mm2 Device width: 2 modules = approx. 36 mm –

Technical Information

Version

Art. no. 576397

PU PG

Info

1/40 8

Blind push-button For System Design. Operator button for blind/roller shutter motors. With electronic locking of blind control. Push-button action < 1s: Stop or inching mode for slat adjustment. Push-button action > 1s: Permanent movement of blind/roller shutters (self-locking). To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. – Technical Information ˜

Version ˜

Art. no.

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium ˜

PU PG

584244 584219 584229 584215 584269 584260

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

8 8 8 8 8 8

584243 584246

1/100 8 1/100 8

metallic

antique brass stainless steel

Blind push-button For OCTOCOLOR. Operator button for blind/roller shutter motors. With electronic locking of blind control.

Blind push-button –

Technical Information: Blind control system functions and device overview

Push-button action < 1s: Stop or inching mode for slat adjustment. Push-button action > 1s: Permanent movement of blind/roller shutters (self-locking).

Blind push-button For System M. Operator button for blind/roller shutter motors. With electronic locking of blind control. Push-button action < 1s: Stop or inching mode for slat adjustment. Push-button action > 1s: Permanent movement of blind/roller shutters (self-locking). To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. – Technical Information

To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. – Technical Information ˜

Version ˜

Version ˜

Info

587744 587719 587725

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium

586244 586219 586214 586260

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

www.merten.com

˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

370

BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM | Blind push-button | ©2010

˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white

˜

Art. no.

582244 582219

1/100 8 1/100 8

582242

1/100 8

582205

1/100 8

metallic

varnished bronze metallic varnished titanium

Info


BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM Blind push-button with sensor connection

Blind push-button with sensor connection –

Technical Information: Blind control system functions and device overview

For OCTOCOLOR. Operator button for blind/roller shutter motors. With electronic locking of blind control. Possible to connect sun sensor. A screw terminal on the blind control insert connects the sensor cable with the blind push-button. Brightness value of sun sensor set to approx. 20,000 lux.

Blind push-button with sensor connection For System M. Operator button for blind/roller shutter motors. With electronic locking of blind control. Possible to connect sun sensor. A screw terminal on the blind control insert connects the sensor cable with the blind push-button. Brightness value of sun sensor set to approx. 20,000 lux. Push-button action < 1s: Stop or inching mode for slat adjustment. Push-button action > 1s: Permanent movement of blind/roller shutters (self-locking).

Version ˜

Art. no.

587844 587819 587825

˜

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white varnished bronze metallic varnished titanium

Info

Art. no.

582544 582519 582542

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

582505

1/100 8

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. – Technical Information

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

PU PG

C

˜

Version

To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. – Technical Information ˜

Blind control system

Push-button action < 1s: Stop or inching mode for slat adjustment. Push-button action > 1s: Permanent movement of blind/roller shutters (self-locking).

586544 586519 586514 586560

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

Blind push-button with sensor connection For System Design. Operator button for blind/roller shutter motors. With electronic locking of blind control. Possible to connect sun sensor. A screw terminal on the blind control insert connects the sensor cable with the blind push-button. Brightness value of sun sensor set to approx. 20,000 lux. Push-button action < 1s: Stop or inching mode for slat adjustment. Push-button action > 1s: Permanent movement of blind/roller shutters (self-locking). To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium ˜

PU PG

584544 584519 584529 584515 584569 584560

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

8 8 8 8 8 8

584543 584546

1/60 8 1/100 8

metallic

antique brass stainless steel

www.merten.com

˜

Art. no.

©2010

| Blind push-button with sensor connection | BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM

371


BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM Blind push-button with memory function and sensor connection

Blind push-button with memory function and sensor connection –

Technical Information: Blind control system functions and device overview

For System Design. Operator button for blind/roller shutter motors. With electronic locking of blind control. Possible to connect sun sensor. The device uses a a memory function for the purpose of presence simulation to save a time for opening and a time for closing the blinds. Which are then repeated every 24 hours. The memory function can be switched on and off at any time. The times are saved by keeping the corresponding direction key pressed down (2 s). A screw terminal on the blind control insert connects the sensor cable with the blind push-button. Brightness value of sun sensor set to approx. 20,000 lux.

Blind push-button with memory function and sensor connection For System M. Operator button for blind/roller shutter motors. With electronic locking of blind control. Possible to connect sun sensor. The device uses a a memory function for the purpose of presence simulation to save a time for opening and a time for closing the blinds. Which are then repeated every 24 hours. The memory function can be switched on and off at any time. The times are saved by keeping the corresponding direction key pressed down (2 s). A screw terminal on the blind control insert connects the sensor cable with the blind push-button. Brightness value of sun sensor set to approx. 20,000 lux.

Blind control system

C

Push-button action < 1s: Stop or inching mode for slat adjustment. Push-button action > 1s: Permanent movement of blind/roller shutters (self-locking). To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. – Technical Information ˜

Version ˜

Info

587944 587919 587925

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. – Technical Information ˜

Version ˜

˜

586344 586319 586314 586360

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

PU PG

584344 584319 584329 584315 584369 584360

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

8 8 8 8 8 8

584343 584346

1/60 8 1/100 8

metallic

antique brass stainless steel

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

www.merten.com

372

Art. no.

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

Push-button action < 1s: Stop or inching mode for slat adjustment. Push-button action > 1s: Permanent movement of blind/roller shutters (self-locking).

BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM | Blind push-button with memory function and sensor connection | ©2010

Info


BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM Blind push-button with memory function and sensor connection For OCTOCOLOR. Operator button for blind/roller shutter motors. With electronic locking of blind control. Possible to connect sun sensor. The device uses a a memory function for the purpose of presence simulation to save a time for opening and a time for closing the blinds. Which are then repeated every 24 hours. The memory function can be switched on and off at any time. The times are saved by keeping the corresponding direction key pressed down (2 s). A screw terminal on the blind control insert connects the sensor cable with the blind push-button. Brightness value of sun sensor set to approx. 20,000 lux.

Blind push-button with IR receiver and sensor connection –

Technical Information: Blind control system functions and device overview

Blind push-button with IR receiver and sensor connection For System M. Operator button for blind/roller shutter motors. Can be manually operated and controlled remotely via IR remote control. With electronic locking of blind control. Possible to connect sun sensor. A screw terminal on the blind control insert connects the sensor cable with the blind push-button. Brightness value of sun sensor set to approx. 20,000 lux.

Push-button action < 1s: Stop or inching mode for slat adjustment. Push-button action > 1s: Permanent movement of blind/roller shutters (self-locking). To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. – Technical Information Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white ˜

PU PG

Version 582344 582319

1/100 8 1/100 8

˜

582342

1/100 8

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy

582305

1/100 8

˜

metallic

varnished bronze metallic varnished titanium

To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. Transmitter: IR remote control Distance, art. no. 570222. – Technical Information ˜

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant 588044 588019 588025

1/100 8 1/100 8 1/100 8

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

Art. no.

586444 586419 586414 586460

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

www.merten.com

˜

Art. no.

C

Push-button action < 1s: Stop or inching mode for slat adjustment. Push-button action > 1s: Permanent movement of blind/roller shutters (self-locking).

˜

Version

Blind control system

©2010

| Blind push-button with IR receiver and sensor connection | BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM

373


BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM Blind push-button with IR receiver and sensor connection For System Design. Operator button for blind/roller shutter motors. Can be manually operated and controlled remotely via IR remote control. With electronic locking of blind control. Possible to connect sun sensor. A screw terminal on the blind control insert connects the sensor cable with the blind push-button. Brightness value of sun sensor set to approx. 20,000 lux.

Blind control system

C

CONNECT roller shutter push-button with sensor connection –

Technical Information: Blind control system functions and device overview

CONNECT radio roller shutter push-button with sensor connection For System M. Operating button for roller shutter motors. Manual operation and remote control possible via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. With electronic locking device. Possible to connect sun/twilight sensor. Radio features: Router A screw terminal on the blind control insert connects the sensor cable with the roller shutter push-button. Brightness value of sun sensor set to approx. 20000 lux.

Push-button action < 1s: Stop or inching mode for slat adjustment. Push-button action > 1s: Permanent movement of blind/roller shutters (self-locking). To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. Transmitter: IR remote control Distance, art. no. 570222. – Technical Information ˜

Version ˜

Art. no.

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium ˜

PU PG

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Roller shutters Up/Down, save sun sensor light value locally With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally master/slave, louvres, up/down duration

584444 584419 584429 584415 584469 584460

1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60

8 8 8 8 8 8

584443 584446

1/60 8 1/60 8

˜

metallic

antique brass stainless steel

To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

Version ˜

Blind push-button with IR receiver and sensor connection For OCTOCOLOR. Operator button for blind/roller shutter motors. Can be manually operated and controlled remotely via IR remote control. With electronic locking of blind control. Possible to connect sun sensor. A screw terminal on the blind control insert connects the sensor cable with the blind push-button. Brightness value of sun sensor set to approx. 20,000 lux.

To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. Transmitter: IR remote control Distance, art. no. 570222. – Technical Information ˜

˜

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white ˜

Art. no.

582444 582419

1/60 8 1/60 8

582442

1/60 8

582405

1/60 8

metallic

www.merten.com

varnished bronze metallic varnished titanium

374

503544 503519 503525

1/60 8 1/60 8 1/60 8

502544 502519 502514 502560

1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

Push-button action < 1s: Stop or inching mode for slat adjustment. Push-button action > 1s: Permanent movement of blind/roller shutters (self-locking).

Version

Info

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM | CONNECT roller shutter push-button with sensor connection | ©2010


BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM CONNECT radio roller shutter push-button with sensor connection

Standard blind time switch –

For System Design. Operating button for roller shutter motors. Manual operation and remote control possible via Merten CONNECT radio system transmitters. With electronic locking device. Possible to connect sun/twilight sensor. Radio features: Router A screw terminal on the blind control insert connects the sensor cable with the roller shutter push-button. Brightness value of sun sensor set to approx. 20000 lux.

Technical Information: Blind control system functions and device overview

Standard blind time switch For System M. For programmed and time-dependent switching of blind/roller shutter motors. Functions: • 4 push-button operation • Pre-set switching times • Time block Mon-Fri: 1xup, 1xdown time can be programmed • Time block Sat-Sun: 1xup, 1xdown time can be programmed • Quick programming function • Programming possible without flush-mounted insert • Reserve power up to 6 hours (without battery) • Reset to restore factory settings • Manual operation possible at any time

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Roller shutters Up/Down, save sun sensor light value locally With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally master/slave, louvres, up/down duration To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. Transmitter: All transmitters of the Merten CONNECT radio system.

Version ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white aluminium ˜

Art. no.

504544 504519 504560

1/60 8 1/60 8 1/60 8

504546

1/60 8

Reversing time on change in direction: min. 1 second Accuracy: ±1 min. per month To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. – Technical Information — Note: In combination with the blind control insert and extension input, art. no. 580699, the extension input does not work. ˜

Version

metallic

varnished stainless steel

Info

C

˜

Art. no.

581444 581419 581425

1/10 8 1/10 8 1/10 8

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

PU PG

581944 581919 581914 581960

1/10 1/10 1/10 1/10

8 8 8 8

new new

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

www.merten.com

˜

Blind control system

©2010

| Standard blind time switch | BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM

375


BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM

Blind control system

C

Standard blind time switch

Standard blind time switch

For System Design. For programmed and time-dependent switching of blind/roller shutter motors. Functions: • 4 push-button operation • Pre-set switching times • Time block Mon-Fri: 1xup, 1xdown time can be programmed • Time block Sat-Sun: 1xup, 1xdown time can be programmed • Quick programming function • Programming possible without flush-mounted insert • Reserve power up to 6 hours (without battery) • Reset to restore factory settings • Manual operation possible at any time

For OCTOCOLOR. For programmed and time-dependent switching of blind/roller shutter motors. Functions: • 4 push-button operation • Pre-set switching times • Time block Mon-Fri: 1xup, 1xdown time can be programmed • Time block Sat-Sun: 1xup, 1xdown time can be programmed • Quick programming function • Programming possible without flush-mounted insert • Reserve power up to 6 hours (without battery) • Reset to restore factory settings • Manual operation possible at any time

Reversing time on change in direction: min. 1 second Accuracy: ±1 min. per month

Reversing time on change in direction: min. 1 second Accuracy: ±1 min. per month

To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. – Technical Information — Note: In combination with the blind control insert and extension input, art. no. 580699, the extension input does not work. ˜

Version ˜

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white aluminium ˜

Art. no.

1/10 8 1/10 8 1/10 8

585946

1/10 8

www.merten.com

376

Version ˜

585944 585919 585960

metallic

varnished stainless steel

To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. – Technical Information — Note: In combination with the blind control insert and extension input, art. no. 580699, the extension input does not work. ˜

BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM | Standard blind time switch | ©2010

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white ˜

Art. no.

583944 583919

1/10 8 1/10 8

583942

1/10 8

583905

1/10 8

metallic

varnished bronze metallic varnished titanium

Info


BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM Blind time switch

Comfort blind time switch –

For System Design. For programmed and time-dependent switching of blind/roller shutter motors. Functions: • 3 independent program memories • Pre-set switching times • 18 programmable switching times • Menu-controlled operation / programming • Reserve power up to 24 hours (without battery) • Reset to restore factory settings • Random-check generator can be activated (in the range ± 15 mins) • Astro function (adjustment ± 2 hours) • Simple to switch from summer to winter time • Individual running time can be programmed • Manual operation possible at any time • Electronic locking of blind control

Technical Information: Blind control system functions and device overview

Blind time switch For System M. For programmed and time-dependent switching of blind/roller shutter motors. Functions: • 3 independent program memories • Pre-set switching times • 18 programmable switching times • Menu-controlled operation / programming • Reserve power up to 24 hours (without battery) • Reset to restore factory settings • Random-check generator can be activated (in the range ± 15 mins) • Astro function (adjustment ± 2 hours) • Simple to switch from summer to winter time • Individual running time can be programmed • Manual operation possible at any time • Electronic locking of blind control To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. – Technical Information ˜

Version

581544 581519 581525

1/10 8 1/10 8 1/10 8

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

PU PG

586144 586119 586114 586160

1/10 1/10 1/10 1/10

C

To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. – Technical Information ˜

Version ˜

Art. no.

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium ˜

PU PG

584144 584119 584129 584115 584169 584160

1/10 1/10 1/10 1/10 1/10 1/10

8 8 8 8 8 8

584143 584146

1/10 8 1/10 8

metallic

antique brass varnished stainless steel

8 8 8 8

Blind time switch For OCTOCOLOR. For programmed and time-dependent switching of blind/roller shutter motors. Functions: • 3 independent program memories • Pre-set switching times • 18 programmable switching times • Menu-controlled operation / programming • Reserve power up to 24 hours (without battery) • Reset to restore factory settings • Random-check generator can be activated (in the range ± 15 mins) • Astro function (adjustment ± 2 hours) • Simple to switch from summer to winter time • Individual running time can be programmed • Manual operation possible at any time • Electronic locking of blind control

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. – Technical Information ˜

Version ˜

Art. no.

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white ˜

PU PG

582144 582119

1/10 8 1/10 8

582142

1/10 8

582105

1/10 8

metallic

varnished bronze metallic varnished titanium

www.merten.com

˜

Art. no.

Blind control system

©2010

| Comfort blind time switch | BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM

377


BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM

Blind control system

C

Blind time switch with sensor connection

Blind time switch with sensor connection

For System M. For programmed and time-dependent switching of blind/roller shutter motors. Possible to connect sun/twilight sensor. The sensor cable is connected with the blind time switch via the plug. Functions: • 3 independent program memories • Pre-set switching times • 18 programmable switching times • Menu-controlled operation / programming • Reserve power up to 24 hours (without battery) • Reset to restore factory settings • Random-check generator can be activated (in the range ± 15 mins) • Astro function (adjustment ± 2 hours) • Simple to switch from summer to winter time • Individual running time can be programmed • Manual operation possible at any time • Electrical interlock for blind control • Configurable brightness values for sun protection and twilight functions. The sun sensor can also be used as a twilight sensor.

For System Design. For programmed and time-dependent switching of blind/roller shutter motors. Possible to connect sun/twilight sensor. The sensor cable is connected with the blind time switch via the plug. Functions: • 3 independent program memories • Pre-set switching times • 18 programmable switching times • Menu-controlled operation / programming • Reserve power up to 24 hours (without battery) • Reset to restore factory settings • Random-check generator can be activated (in the range ± 15 mins) • Astro function (adjustment ± 2 hours) • Simple to switch from summer to winter time • Individual running time can be programmed • Manual operation possible at any time • Electrical interlock for blind control • Configurable brightness values for sun protection and twilight functions. The sun sensor can also be used as a twilight sensor.

To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. – Technical Information ˜

Version ˜

Info

1/10 8 1/10 8 1/10 8

586744 586719 586714 586760

1/10 1/10 1/10 1/10

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

www.merten.com

378

Version ˜

581644 581619 581625

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. – Technical Information ˜

BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM | Comfort blind time switch | ©2010

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium ˜

Art. no.

585144 585119 585129 585115 585169 585160

1/10 1/10 1/10 1/10 1/10 1/10

8 8 8 8 8 8

585143 585146

1/10 8 1/10 8

metallic

antique brass varnished stainless steel

Info


BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM Blind time switch with sensor connection For OCTOCOLOR. For programmed and time-dependent switching of blind/roller shutter motors. Possible to connect sun/twilight sensor. The sensor cable is connected with the blind time switch via the plug. Functions: • 3 independent program memories • Pre-set switching times • 18 programmable switching times • Menu-controlled operation / programming • Reserve power up to 24 hours (without battery) • Reset to restore factory settings • Random-check generator can be activated (in the range ± 15 mins) • Astro function (adjustment ± 2 hours) • Simple to switch from summer to winter time • Individual running time can be programmed • Manual operation possible at any time • Electrical interlock for blind control • Configurable brightness values for sun protection and twilight functions. The sun sensor can also be used as a twilight sensor. To be completed with: Blind control insert, art. no. 580698, 580699. Accessories: Sun/twilight sensor, art. no. 580691. – Technical Information ˜

˜

PU PG

Technical Information: Blind control system functions and device overview

Sun/twilight sensor The light sensor is attached to the window pane with the suction cup. Can be used either as a sun sensor or as a twilight sensor. The position of the sensor determines the starting point of the blind.

C

To be completed with: Blind push-button with sensor connection, art. no. System M 5878.., 5865.., System Basis 5805..,System Design 5845.., OCTOCOLOR 5825... Blind push-button with memory function and sensor connection, art. no. System M 5879.., 5863.., System Basis 5803..,System Design 5843.., OCTOCOLOR 5823... Blind push-button with IR receiver and sensor connection, art. no. System M 5880.., 5864.., System Basis 5804..,System Design 5844.., OCTOCOLOR 5824... Blind push-button with radio receiver and sensor connection, art.no. System M 5936.., System Design 5935... Blind time switch with sensor connection, art. no. System M 5816.., 5867.., System Basis 5811..,System Design 5851.., OCTOCOLOR 5831... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

2 m, polar white

580691

PU PG

Info

1/54 8

Info

Wind sensor 583144 583119

1/10 8 1/10 8

583142

1/10 8

583105

1/10 8

To raise and protect the blinds depending on the wind force. The device is connected to the wind sensor interface. The wind sensor is installed on the roof or on the outside wall of the building and converts the measured wind speeds into electrical signals.

metallic

varnished bronze metallic varnished titanium

Blind control system

Connecting cable: 2 m / LIYY 2x0.14 mm2

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white ˜

Art. no.

Type of protection: IP 65 To be completed with: Wind sensor interface, art. no. 580693. Technical Information — Contents: With fixing bracket. ˜ –

Version

Art. no.

polar white

580692

PU PG

Info

1/2 8

Wind sensor with heating With integrated heating for trouble-free operation in winter. To raise and protect the blinds depending on the wind force. The device is connected to the wind sensor interface. The wind sensor is installed on the roof or on the outside wall of the building and converts the measured wind speeds into electrical signals. Type of protection: IP 65 To be completed with: Wind sensor interface, art. no. 580693. Separate power supply unit AC/DC 24 V/ 70 W – Technical Information — Contents: With fixing bracket. ˜

Version

Art. no.

polar white

580690

PU PG

Info

1/2 8 www.merten.com

Version

Sensors

©2010

| Sensors | BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM

379


BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM Wind sensor interface

CONNECT radio universal remote control

AC 230 V, 50 Hz Evaluation units for wind sensors / wind sensors with heating. For connection to the extension input of the blind control insert. Can also be connected to the Merten KNX via binary inputs.

Radio remote control and IR remote control in a single device. For activating: • Devices of the Merten CONNECT radio system • Merten IR devices • Up to five IR AV devices such as TV, DVD, DVDR, VCR, SAT, cable, AMP and DMR In connection with the CONNECT radio system, several rooms can be set up with radio components using the remote control. Each room can be configured with up to 9 groups with maximum 12 devices and 3 scenes with maximum 12 devices. Radio features: System administrator, transmitter

Supply voltage: AC 230 V, 50 Hz Output: floating contact for the control of the blind control insert Response time: approx. 15 sec. (after the selected wind strength has been exceeded) Overshoot time: approx. 15 min. (after the selected wind strength has not been reached)

Blind control system

C

To be completed with: Wind sensor, art. no. 580692. Wind sensor with heating, art. no. 580690. Blind control insert with extension input, art. no. 580699. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

polar white

580693

PU PG

Functions: EASY CONNECT: • Switch on, switch off, toggle, dim, raise/lower roller shutters, scene • Programming in EASY CONNECT as a system administrator • Individual programming of CONNECT radio push-buttons • Individual description of rooms and groups • Display of description in LCD display With CONNECT radio configuration tool: • additionally graphic programming of the EASY CONNECT functions Extended functions for IR/AV: • Trigger Philips Ambilight • Supports more than 1,000 manufacturers. Devices are selected from a list or by entering programming codes. • General use of the functions of a device (e.g. volume) in all modes.

Info

1/25 8

Remote controls –

Technical Information: Blind control system functions and device overview

IR remote control Distance 2010 10 channel IR remote control. For the control of all TELE sensor covers, blind push-buttons with IR receiver, presence detectors with IR receivers and KNX devices with IR receivers.

Radio range: up to 100 m in free field, up to 30 m indoors IR range: up to 15 m Battery: 3 microcells (IEC LR 03, AAA) Display element: LCD display with 10 characters

Battery: 2 microcells (IEC LR 03, AAA) Range: up to 20 m Receiver: TELE sensor cover, art. no. System M 5779.., 5703.., 5711.., System Basis 5748.., System Design 5709.., OCTOCOLOR 5749... Blind push-button with IR receiver and sensor connection, art. no. System M 5880.., 5864.., System Basis 5804..,System Design 5844.., OCTOCOLOR 5824... ARGUS Presence with IR receiver, art. no. 550591, 6309... Push-button, 4-gang plus with IR receiver, art. no. System M 6175.., 6279... — Contents: Without battery. ˜

Art. no. 570222

PU PG 1/48 8

www.merten.com

Version black

380

BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM | Remote controls | ©2010

Info

˜ —

Receiver: All receivers of the Merten CONNECT radio system. Note: The device can assume the properties of a system administrator. The remote control must be used as the system administrator in connection with the EASY CONNECT method. In connection with the CONNECT radio configurator, it can be used as required. Contents: With battery.With a codes table for nearly all conventional devices, like TV, VCR, DVD, SAT, AUX, ...

Version

Art. no.

Aluminium/black

506923

PU PG 1/6 8

Info


BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM

Blind control system

www.merten.com

C

©2010

| Remote controls | BLIND CONTROL SYSTEM

381


Building communications

OPTIMAL COMFORT AND SECURITY

Building communication

Intelligent solutions in building communications

www.merten.de

Quality building communications: the combination of Merten's switch design and TwinBus technology by Ritto provides optimal comfort and security.

382

From the TwinBus flush mounted staircase intercom, to the TwinBus flush-mounted intercom, and the TwinBus flush-mounted video intercom â&#x20AC;&#x201C; all can be combined with System M's 42 extremely low-profile frames, which enable over 280 different functions. With the TwinBus technology, you can easily develop a plan for your building communications that is perfectly adapted to your needs and both sturdy and easy to install. An ideal solution for single-family homes, office buildings, and housing complexes. With KNX technology and USB interfaces, the options are nearly infinite.

Building communications | Ritto TwinBus | Š2010

Easy installation


Building communications

Contents

Building communication

Extra slim housing â&#x20AC;&#x201C; only 16 mm installation height

TwinBus flush-mounted intercom in Merten switch design

TwinBus flush-mounted staircase door intercom in Merten switch design

www.merten.de

TwinBus video flush-mounted intercom in Merten switch design

Š2010

| Ritto TwinBus | Building communications

383


BUILDING COMMUNICATIONS / RITTO TWINBUS Flush-mounted intercom

Building communicationsBuilding communications / Ritto TwinbusSystem electronicsBuilding communications / Ritto TwinbusBuilding communications / Ritto TwinbusR

Technical Information: Building communications

For TwinBus intercom system. Voice communication to the door station and opening the main door and/or door to the individual floor. • Door opening key • Key for staircase light or call silencing • Call silencing: The door call signal is visual • Accept/end call • Voice and call tone volume control in 4 levels • 5 call tones • Call tone distinction for door/floor • Call connecting relay • Disable listening-in • For use with up to 10 bell keys for door intercoms • Large wiring compartment • Low mounting height (16 mm) It is mounted on a conventional, flat, flushmounted device box, DIN 49073, part 1. Supply voltage: TwinBus from power supply unit 17573 Power consumption in stand-by: max. 3 mA Operating elements: Door opening key, key for staircase lighting/call silencing, volume control, accept/end call Dimensions: 126 x 55 mm (HxW)

Components for Ritto TwinBus

Flush-mounted video intercom For TwinBus video intercom system with colour image. Voice and visual communication to the door station, and opening the main door and/or door to the individual floors. • Door opening key • Key for staircase light or call silencing • Call silencing: The door call signal is visualised. • Accept/end call • 1 freely configurable key for special function • Voice and call tone volume control in 8 levels • 8 call tones incl. 3-tone gong • Call activation relay/door opening mechanism • Call tone distinction for door/floor/internal • Switching the video image on/off • Camera selection, camera control • Disable to prevent others listening/viewing • Internal calls/8 switching commands (menu) • For use with up to 10 bell keys for door intercoms • Large wiring compartment • Low mounting height (16 mm) It is mounted on a conventional, flat, flushmounted device box, DIN 49073, part 1. Supply voltage: 18-24 V DC from video network device 16477 Interface: USB (preconfiguration) Output: 1, floating, 24V, 1A (for example, for external signal generator via call activation relay) Display: 2.0“ colour TFT, LED backlight Operating elements: Cursor keys, door opening key, key for staircase lighting/call silencing, accept/end call and special function Dimensions: 197x55 mm (HxW)

Building communicatio ns

R

To be completed with: Frame 3-gang without central bridge piece, art. no. 1-M 3899.., ATELIER-M 3889.., M-SMART 4789.., 4849.., M-ARC 4859.., M-STAR 4709.., 4769.., 4869.., M-PLAN 4889.., MPLAN glass 4779.., M-PLAN metal frame 4759... — Contents: TwinBus connecting terminal and videobus.Retaining ring and screws. ˜

Version ˜

700144 700119 700125

1/12 8.9 1/12 8.9 1/12 8.9

˜

˜

701144 701119 701114 701160

1/12 1/12 1/12 1/12

700244 700219 700225

1/12 8.8 1/12 8.8 1/12 8.8

Info

701244 701219 701214 701260

1/12 1/12 1/12 1/12

8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

Info

8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

www.merten.com

384

PU PG

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

Art. no.

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Version

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

To be completed with: Frame 2-gang without central bridge piece, art. no. 1-M 3898.., ATELIER-M 3888.., M-SMART 4788.., 4848.., M-ARC 4858.., M-STAR 4668.., 4768.., 4868.., M-PLAN 4888.., MPLAN glass 4878.., M-PLAN metal frame 4758... — Contents: TwinBus connecting terminal.Retaining ring and screws. ˜

BUILDING COMMUNICATIONS / RITTO TWINBUS | Components for Ritto TwinBus | ©2010


BUILDING COMMUNICATIONS / RITTO TWINBUS Flush-mounted staircase door station For TwinBus intercom systems with voice communication to the intercoms. The door station is installed inside, in front of the floor door or apartment door. • Door bell key • Key for staircase timer, can be switched off • Volume for microphone and loudspeaker adjustable • Large wiring compartment • Large nameplate, can be replaced from the front • Low mounting height (16 mm) It is mounted on a conventional, flat, flushmounted device box, DIN 49073, part 1. Supply voltage: TwinBus from power supply unit 17573 Operating elements: Door bell key, key for staircase lighting Dimensions: 126 x 55 mm (HxW)

Building communicatio ns

R

To be completed with: Frame 2-gang without central bridge piece, art. no. 1-M 3898.., ATELIER-M 3888.., M-SMART 4788.., 4848.., M-ARC 4858.., M-STAR 4668.., 4768.., 4868.., M-PLAN 4888.., MPLAN glass 4878.., M-PLAN metal frame 4758... — Contents: TwinBus connecting terminal.Retaining ring and screws. ˜

Version

1/12 8.8 1/12 8.8 1/12 8.8

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

700544 700519 700525

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

PU PG

701544 701519 701514 701560

1/12 1/12 1/12 1/12

8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

www.merten.com

˜

Art. no.

©2010

| Components for Ritto TwinBus | BUILDING COMMUNICATIONS / RITTO TWINBUS

385


ARGUS surface-mounted movement detectors

The best in all-round protection

Movement detectors

The ARGUS movement detector is ideal anywhere that on-demand lighting control is needed, including entryways, corridors, stairways, offices, public buildings and terraces. ARGUS surface-mounted movement detectors These well-designed movement detectors ensure safety and convenience outdoors. For example, entryways are lighted on demand â&#x20AC;&#x201C; ideal for greeting visitors as well as for putting uninvited guests into the spotlight, whether they want to be or not.

By employing a movement and presence detector, individual households can also save energy and contribute to environmental protection. Merten products can easily and conveniently reduce energy costs with lighting control, heating and multimedia control tailored to your needs.

www.merten.de

The detectors sweep across a detection angle from 70 to 360° to detect motion. An optional radio network as well as remote control setting and use make operation even more convenient.

Convenience, functionality and safety are the key elements to take into account when selecting building technology systems. Energy efficiency is another important criterion. Merten places a high priority on developing sustainable products and solutions in order to protect our resources and the resources of future generations.

386

ARGUS surface-mounted movement detector | Š2010

ARGUS 220, remote control aluminium


ARGUS surface-mounted movement detectors

Contents

ARGUS surface-mounted movement detectors: The right solution for any application ARGUS 70

7 m

• F or safety and security in the smallest of spaces •A  ngle of detection: 70°

ARGUS 110 & 220 Basic

ARGUS 300

Movement detectors

24

24

m

m

24

220 Basic

• The value-for-money basic models • Angle of detection: 110° (ARGUS 110 Basic) 220° (ARGUS 220 Basic)

16

110 Basic

m

12 m

12 m

m

• Monitors two house fronts simultaneously • Angle of detection: 300°

ARGUS 360

ARGUS 220 | ARGUS 220 FOR 12 V | ARGUS 220, remote controllable 20 m

32 m

28 m

16 m

KNX ARGUS 220

28 m

• with integrated interface for a radio module for networking • Angle of detection: 220° • Sensitivity adjustable • 12 V Low voltage (ARGUS 220 for 12 V) • remote controllable (ARGUS 220, remote control)

• For indoor and outdoor ceiling mounting • Angle of detection: 360°

16 m

• for direct connection to KNX • Angle of detection: 220° 28 m

RADIO ARGUS 220 CONNECT 16 m

28 m

16 m

• for networking of up to 4 movement detectors • Angle of detection: 220°

©2010

| ARGUS surface-mounted movement detector

www.merten.de

• With integrated light-sensitive time switch, can be networked by radio • Angle of detection: 220°

387


ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR ARGUS 110 Basic

Movement detectorsARGUS surface-mounted movement detectorSecurity electronicsMovement detectorsSurface-mounted movement detectorsARGUS surface-mounted movement detectorF

Technical Information: Surface-mounted movement detector

Electronic outdoor movement detector. 110° surface monitoring for smaller house fronts and sections of the house. • 360° short-range zone (approx. 4 m radius). • Large wiring compartment and plug system. • Looping is possible. • LED function display for fast alignment at the installation site. • Operating elements are protected under the easily accessible cover plate. • Flexibly adjustable sensor head. • Possible to blank out individual lens areas. Can be installed on walls and ceilings without additional accessories. Can be mounted on inner/outer corners and stationary pipes using a mounting bracket. Mains voltage: AC 230 V, ± 10 %, 50 Hz Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2000 W Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, max. 1200 W Fluorescent lamps: AC 230 V, 1200 W uncompensated Capacitive load: max. 35 µF Max. switching current: 16 A, AC 230 V, cos = 1 Angle of detection: 110° Range: max. 12 m Number of levels: 7 Number of zones: 92 with 368 switching segments Light sensor: infinitely adjustable from 31000 lux Time: 1 sec. to approx. 8 min. in 6 levels Neutral conductor: required Possible to set the sensor head Wall mounting: 9° up, 24° down, 12° left/right, ± 12° axial Ceiling mounting: 4° up, 29° down, 25° left/ right, ± 8.5° axial EC guidelines: Low voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC Type of protection: IP 55

ARGUS movement detector, standard

ARGUS 70 Electronic outdoor movement detector. 70° surface monitoring for smaller areas such as gateways, entrances or staircases. Mains voltage: AC 230 V ±10 %, 50 Hz Connected load: up to 500 VA Max. switching current: 2 A, AC 230 V, cos = 0,6 Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, up to 300 W Capacitive load: max. 21 µF Power consumption: < 1 W Number of levels: 4 Number of zones: 26 with 104 switching segments Area of detection: 70° surface monitoring, approx. 7x8 m Light sensor: infinitely adjustable from 31000 lux Range: approx. 7 m Time: 1 sec. to approx. 8 min. in 6 steps Ambient temperature: -25 °C to +55 °C Neutral conductor: required Type of protection: IP 44

Movement detectors

F ˜ –

Accessories: Capacitor, art. no. 542895. Technical Information

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white dark brazil

545719 545715

1/20 8.4 1/20 8.4

Info

Accessories: Mounting bracket, art. no. 565291/92/93. Capacitor, art. no. 542895. – Technical Information — Contents: With cover plate and segments to limit the area of detection, screws and plugs. ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

565119

1/6 8.4

www.merten.com

Version polar white

388

ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR | ARGUS movement detector, standard | ©2010

Info


ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR ARGUS 220 Basic

ARGUS 220

Electronic outdoor movement detector. 220° surface monitoring for large house fronts and sections of the house. • 360° short-range zone (approx. 4 m radius). • Large wiring compartment and plug system. • Looping is possible. • LED function display for fast alignment at the installation site. • Operating elements are protected under the easily accessible cover plate. • Flexibly adjustable sensor head. • Possible to blank out individual lens areas. Can be installed on walls and ceilings without additional accessories. Can be mounted on inner/outer corners and stationary pipes using a mounting bracket. Mains voltage: AC 230 V, ± 10 %, 50 Hz Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2000 W Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, max. 1200 W Fluorescent lamps: AC 230 V, 1200 W uncompensated Capacitive load: max. 35 µF Max. switching current: 16 A, AC 230 V, cos = 1 Angle of detection: 220° Range: max. 12 m Number of levels: 7 Number of zones: 112 with 448 switching segments Light sensor: infinitely adjustable from 31000 lux Time: 1 sec. to approx. 8 min. in 6 levels Neutral conductor: required Possible to set the sensor head Wall mounting: 9° up, 24° down, 12° left/right, ± 12° axial Ceiling mounting: 4° up, 29° down, 25° left/ right, ± 8.5° axial EC guidelines: Low voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC Type of protection: IP 55

Electronic outdoor movement detector. 220° surface monitoring for large house fronts and sections of the house. With an integrated interface for extension with a radio module (wireless connection of several devices). • 360° short-range zone (approx. 4 m radius). • Large wiring compartment and plug system. • Looping is possible. • LED function display for fast alignment at the installation site. • Operating elements are protected under the easily accessible cover plate. • Flexibly adjustable sensor head. • Possible to blank out individual lens areas. Can be installed on walls and ceilings without additional accessories. Can be mounted on inner/outer corners and stationary pipes using a mounting bracket. Functions: The following functions are possible via radio with an integrated radio module: Permanent ON, Permanent OFF and AUTOMATIC.

Accessories: Mounting bracket, art. no. 565291/92/93. Capacitor, art. no. 542895. – Technical Information — Contents: With cover plate and segments to limit the area of detection, screws and plugs. Art. no.

PU PG

565219

1/12 8.4

Info

Accessories: Radio module for ARGUS 220 movement detector, art. no. 565495. Mounting bracket, art. no. 565291/92/93. Capacitor, art. no. 542895. – Technical Information — Contents: With cover plate and segments to limit the area of detection, screws and plugs. ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white dark brazil aluminium

565419 565415 565469

1/12 8.4 1/6 8.4 1/6 8.4

Info

www.merten.com

Version

F

Mains voltage: AC 230 V, ± 10 %, 50 Hz Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2000 W Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2000 W Fluorescent lamps: AC 230 V, 1200 W uncompensated Capacitive load: max. 35 µF Max. switching current: 16 A, AC 230 V, cos = 1 Angle of detection: 220° Range: max. 16 m Number of levels: 7 Number of zones: 112 with 448 switching segments Light sensor: infinitely adjustable from 31000 lux Time: 1 sec. to approx. 8 min. in 6 levels Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Neutral conductor: required Possible to set the sensor head Wall mounting: 9° up, 24° down, 12° left/right, ± 12° axial Ceiling mounting: 4° up, 29° down, 25° left/ right, ± 8.5° axial EC guidelines: Low voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC Type of protection: IP 55

˜

polar white

Movement detectors

©2010

| ARGUS movement detector, standard | ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR

389


ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR ARGUS 220 Timer Electronic outdoor movement detector. 220° surface monitoring for large house fronts and sections of the house. With integrated light-sensitive time switch and interface for extension with a radio module (wireless connection of several devices). • 360° short-range zone (approx. 4 m radius). • Large wiring compartment and plug system. • Looping is possible. • LED function display for fast alignment at the installation site. • Operating elements are protected under the easily accessible cover plate. • Flexibly adjustable sensor head. • Possible to blank out individual lens areas. Can be installed on walls and ceilings without additional accessories. Can be mounted on inner/outer corners and stationary pipes using a mounting bracket.. Functions: • Semi-automatic function: In the evening, when the ambient light level falls to the set twilight threshold, the lighting will be switched on, then switched off again at the set time (e.g. 23:00). After this, the normal movement detector function is active. • Automatic function: like the semi-automatic function. In the morning, the lighting is switched on again at the pre-set time (e.g. 5.00 a.m.) and switched off when the twilight threshold is reached. In between, the normal movement detector function is active. • Automatic time switch function: In the evening and the morning, the switch provides a brightness-dependent timer function (disabled under ARGUS), in between these times it provides the normal movement detector function. • Semi-automatic time switch function: In the evening the switch provides a brightnessdependent timer function (disabled under ARGUS), after that it provides the normal movement detector function. • Pure movement detector function The following functions are possible via radio with an integrated radio module: Permanent ON, Permanent OFF, AUTOMATIC and SET (Teaching in current twilight value. No manual adjustment possible).

Movement detectors

www.merten.com

F

390

Mains voltage: AC 230 V, ± 10 %, 50 Hz Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2000 W Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2000 W Fluorescent lamps: AC 230 V, 1200 W uncompensated Capacitive load: max. 35 µF Max. switching current: 16 A, AC 230 V, cos = 1 Angle of detection: 220° Range: max. 16 m Number of levels: 7 Number of zones: 112 with 448 switching segments Light sensor: infinitely adjustable from 31000 lux Time: 1 sec. to approx. 8 min. in 6 levels Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Neutral conductor: required Possible to set the sensor head Wall mounting: 9° up, 24° down, 12° left/right, ± 12° axial Ceiling mounting: 4° up, 29° down, 25° left/ right, ± 8.5° axial EC guidelines: Low voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC Type of protection: IP 55

Accessories: Radio module for ARGUS 220 movement detector, art. no. 565495. Mounting bracket, art. no. 565291/92/93. Capacitor, art. no. 542895. – Technical Information — Contents: With cover plate and segments to limit the area of detection, screws and plugs. ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white dark brazil aluminium

565619 565615 565669

1/6 8.4 1/6 8.4 1/6 8.4

Info

ARGUS 220 for 12 V Electronic outdoor movement detector. 220° surface monitoring for large house fronts and sections of the house. 12 V version. With an integrated interface for extension with a radio module (wireless connection of several devices). • 360° short-range zone (approx. 4 m radius). • Large wiring compartment and plug system. • Looping is possible. • LED function display for fast alignment at the installation site. • Operating elements are protected under the easily accessible cover plate. • Flexibly adjustable sensor head. • Possible to blank out individual lens areas. Can be installed on walls and ceilings without additional accessories. Can be mounted on inner/outer corners and stationary pipes using a mounting bracket. Functions: The following functions are possible via radio with an integrated radio module: Permanent ON, Permanent OFF and AUTOMATIC. Supply voltage: DC 12 V Switch contact: floating Max. switching current: 5 A, DC 12 V 5 A, AC 230 V, cos = 1 Power consumption: <1 W Angle of detection: 220° Range: max. 16 m Number of levels: 7 Number of zones: 112 with 448 switching segments Light sensor: infinitely adjustable from 31000 lux Time: 1 sec. to approx. 8 min. in 6 levels Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Possible to set the sensor head Wall mounting: 9° up, 24° down, 12° left/right, ± 12° axial Ceiling mounting: 4° up, 29° down, 25° left/ right, ± 8.5° axial EC guidelines: Low voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC Type of protection: IP 55 Accessories: Radio module for ARGUS 220 movement detector, art. no. 565495. Mounting bracket, art. no. 565291/92/93. Capacitor, art. no. 542895. – Technical Information — Dark brazil and aluminium are available on request. Contents: With cover plate and segments to limit the area of detection, screws and plugs. ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white

565426

1/6 8.4

ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR | ARGUS movement detector, standard | ©2010

Info


ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR ARGUS 300

ARGUS 360

Electronic outdoor movement detector. 300° surface monitoring for mounting on house corners in order to secure the area of two house walls. The range of the area of detection can be adjusted in sectors with three selectively adjustable 100° sectors. This makes it possible to compensate for a site that slopes upwards or downwards. • 360° short-range zone (approx. 4 m radius). • Large wiring compartment and plug system. • Looping is possible. • LED function display for fast alignment at the installation site. • Operating elements for setting the brightness threshold, time and sensitivity (range). • Flexibly adjustable sensor head. • Possible to blank out individual lens areas. For installation on house corners without requiring additional accessories. To prevent obstacles such as downpipes from blanking the area of detection when installed on corners, an extension can be installed. Mains voltage: AC 230 V, ± 10 %, 50 Hz Incandescent lamps: max. 3000 W Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2500 W Capacitive load: max. 140 µF Max. switching current: 16 A, AC 230 V, cos = 0,6 Power consumption: <1 W Angle of detection: 300° Range: max. 16 m Number of levels: 7 Number of zones: 123 with 492 switching segments Light sensor: infinitely externally adjustable Art. no. 564319 approx. 3-1000 lux Art. no. 564315 approx. 5-1000 lux Time: externally adjustable in 6 levels of approx. 1 sec. to approx. 8 min. Neutral conductor: required Possible to adjust the sensor head: Horizontal rotation to the left and right by 30°. Swivelling of the sensor head to the right or left by 45°. EC guidelines: Low voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC Type of protection: IP 55

Electronic movement detector for outdoor ceiling mounting. 360° surface monitoring over a length of 30 m and a width of 20 m. • Operating elements for setting the brightness threshold and time. • LED function display for fast alignment at the installation site. Mains voltage: AC 230 V, ± 10 %, 50 Hz Incandescent lamps: max. 3000 W Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2500 W Capacitive load: max. 140 µF Max. switching current: 16 A, AC 230 V, cos = 0,6 Power consumption: < 1 W Angle of detection: 360° Range: max. 16 m Number of levels: 7 Number of zones: 124 with 496 switching segments Light sensor: infinitely adjustable Art. no. 564419 approx. 3-1000 lux Art. no. 564415 approx. 5-1000 lux Time: adjustable in 6 levels of approx. 1 sec. to approx. 8 min. Neutral conductor: required EC guidelines: Low voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC Type of protection: IP 55

Movement detectors

F

Accessories: Capacitor, art. no. 542895. Technical Information — Contents: With screws and plugs. ˜ –

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white dark brazil

564419 564415

1/6 8.4 1/6 8.4

Info

Accessories: Extension, art. no. 554395/99. Capacitor, art. no. 542895. – Technical Information — Contents: With 2 blanking inserts to limit the area of detection, unlocking clamp, screws and plugs. ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

564319 564315

1/3 8.4 1/3 8.4

Info

www.merten.com

Version polar white dark brazil

©2010

| ARGUS movement detector, standard | ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR

391


ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR ARGUS movement detector, remote control

Movement detectors

F

ARGUS movement detector, CONNECT radio system

ARGUS 220, remote-controlled

Radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT

Electronic outdoor movement detector. 220° surface monitoring for large house fronts and sections of the house. With radio remote control. • 360° short-range zone (approx. 4 m radius). • Large wiring compartment and plug system. • Looping is possible. • LED function display for fast alignment at the installation site. • Operating elements are protected under the easily accessible cover plate. • Flexibly adjustable sensor head. • Possible to blank out individual lens areas. Can be installed on walls and ceilings without additional accessories. Can be mounted on inner/outer corners and stationary pipes using a mounting bracket. Functions: The following settings can be performed on the ARGUS via the radio remote control: Operating mode (permanent ON, permanent OFF, automatic), brightness threshold, switching duration, set and change the sensitivity to movement.

Electronic outdoor movement detector. 220° surface monitoring for large house fronts and sections of the house. • 360° short-range zone (approx. 4 m radius). • Large wiring compartment and plug system. • Looping is possible. • LED function display for fast alignment at the installation site. • Operating elements are protected under the easily accessible cover plate. • Flexibly adjustable sensor head. • Possible to blank out individual lens areas. Can be installed on walls and ceilings without additional accessories. Can be mounted on inner/outer corners and stationary pipes using a mounting bracket. Functions: Up to four radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT devices can be networked and set via the remote control (permanent ON, permanent OFF, automatic, brightness threshold, switching time, set and change the sensitivity to movement.) In conjunction with the CONNECT radio configuration tool, you can: • fully integrate the radio ARGUS 200 CONNECT into the radio network and network with other devices. • Teaching receivers. • Use function module like scene, message and alarm.

Mains voltage: AC 230 V ±10 %, 50 Hz Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2000 W Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2000 W Fluorescent lamps: AC 230 V, 1200 W uncompensated Capacitive load: max. 35 µF Max. switching current: 16 A, AC 230 V, cos = 1 Angle of detection: 220° Range: max. 16 m Number of levels: 7 Number of zones: 112 with 448 switching segments Light sensor: infinitely adjustable from 31000 Lux Time: 1 sec. to approx. 8 min. in 6 steps Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Neutral conductor: required Sensor head adjustment for wall mounting: 9° up, 24° down, 12° left/right, ± 12° axial Sensor head adjustment for ceiling mounting: 4° up, 29° down, 25° left/right, ± 8.5° axial EC directives: Low voltage directive 2006/95/ EEC and EMC directive 2004/108/EEC Type of protection: IP 55 Dimensions: 151x93x71 mm (HxWxD)

Mains voltage: AC 230 V ±10 %, 50 Hz Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2000 W Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2000 W Fluorescent lamps: AC 230 V, 1200 W uncompensated Capacitive load: max. 35 µF Max. switching current: 16 A, AC 230 V, cos = 1 Angle of detection: 220° Range: max. 16 m Number of levels: 7 Number of zones: 112 with 448 switching segments Light sensor: infinitely adjustable from 31000 Lux Time: 1 sec. to approx. 8 min. in 6 steps Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Neutral conductor: required Sensor head adjustment for wall mounting: 9° up, 24° down, 12° left/right, ± 12° axial Sensor head adjustment for ceiling mounting: 4° up, 29° down, 25° left/right, ± 8.5° axial EC directives: Low voltage directive 2006/95/ EEC and EMC directive 2004/108/EEC Radio frequency: 868 MHz Transmission range: up to 100 m in free field, up to 30 m indoors Type of protection: IP 55 Dimensions: 151x93x71 mm (HxWxD)

For remote control: Channels: 1 Radio frequency: 868 MHz Range: up to 100 m (free field) up to 30 m (building) Battery: 1 lithium button cell (CR 2450N) Display elements: Status LED Accessories: Mounting bracket, art. no. 565291, 565293. Capacitor, art. no. 542895. Replacement part: Remote control for ARGUS 220, remote-controlled, art. no. 565590. – Technical Information — Contents: With cover plate and segments to limit the area of detection, screws and plugs.Remote control.

www.merten.com

˜

392

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white aluminium

565519 565560

1/12 8.4 1/12 8.4

Info

Accessories: Remote control for radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT, art. no. 509590. Mounting bracket, art. no. 565291, 565293. Capacitor, art. no. 542895. — Contents: With cover plate and segments to limit the area of detection, screws and plugs. ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white aluminium

509519 509560

1/12 8.4 1/12 8.4

ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR | ARGUS movement detector, remote control | ©2010

Info


ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR Remote control for radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT

ARGUS movement detector, KNX

KNX ARGUS 220

One radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT or one radio receiver switch each can be taught, networked and set for each key (A1-A4) on the remote control.

KNX movement detector for outdoors. 220° surface monitoring for large house fronts and sections of the house. With integrated bus coupler. The physical address is programmed with a magnet. • 360° short-range zone (approx. 4 m radius). • Large wiring compartment and plug system. • Looping is possible. • LED function display for fast alignment at the installation site. • Operating elements are protected under the easily accessible cover plate. • Flexibly adjustable sensor head. • Possible to blank out individual lens areas. Can be installed on walls and ceilings without additional accessories. Can be mounted on inner/outer corners and stationary pipes using a mounting bracket. KNX software functions: Five movement blocks: up to four functions can be triggered per block. Telegrams: 1 bit, 1 byte, 2 bytes. Normal operation, master, slave, safety pause, disable function. Sensitivity, brightness and staircase timer can be set using the ETS or the potentiometer. Self-adjusting staircase timer.

Functions: You can set the following functions on the ARGUS: Operating mode (permanent ON, permanent OFF, automatic), brightness threshold, switching duration, set and change the sensitivity to movement. Channels: 4 Radio frequency: 868 MHz Range: up to 100 m in free field, up to 30 m indoors Battery: 1 lithium button cell (CR 2450N) Display elements: Status LED —

Receiver: Radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT, art. no. 5095... Contents: With battery.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

509590

1/48 8.4

Info

Movement detectors

F

Angle of detection: 220° Range: max. 16 m Number of levels: 7 Number of zones: 112 with 448 switching segments Light sensor: infinitely variable from approx. 3 1000 lux,  lux (infinite: movement detection is independent of the position of the sensor head) Time: can be set externally from 1 s to approx. 8 min. in 6 levels or via ETS from approx. 3 s to approx. 152 hours Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Possible settings for sensor head: Wall mounting: 9° up, 24° down, 12° left/right, ±12° axial Ceiling mounting: 4° up, 29° down, 25° left/ right, ±8.5° axial EC directives: Low-voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC directive 2004/108/EC Type of protection: IP 55 Accessories: Mounting bracket, art. no. 565291/92/93. Programming magnet for valve drive EMO, art. no. 639190. — Contents: With cover plate and segments to limit the area of detection, screws and plugs. ˜

Version

Art. no.

polar white dark brazil aluminium

632519 632515 632569

PU PG

Info

1/12 9 1/6 9 1/6 9

www.merten.com

˜

©2010

| ARGUS movement detector, KNX | ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR

393


ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR Radio module for ARGUS 220 movement detector

Accessories

Mounting bracket

For the wireless networking of several ARGUS 220 or ARGUS 220 Timer devices. A registered movement is sent to all taught movement detectors via the radio module. With integrated transmitter and receiver. The radio module can be retrofitted into the movement detector.

Installation bracket for attaching the ARGUS 110/220 Basic, ARGUS 220/Timer to outer of inner corners. Can also be secured to fixed pipes (VDE 0100) with conventional conduit clips.

Functions: The radio module supports the functions permanent ON, permanent OFF, AUTOMATIC and SET (ARGUS 220 Timer only). The ARGUS uses the current twilight threshold for switching on in the SET function.

To be completed with: ARGUS 110/220 Basic, art. no. 565119, 565219. ARGUS 220 art. no. 5654... ARGUS 220 Timer, art. no. 5656... ARGUS 220, remote control, art. no. 5655... Radio ARGUS 220 CONNECT, art. no. 5095... In KNX, to be completed with: INSTABUS ARGUS 220 Connect, art. no. 6315... KNX ARGUS 220, art. no. 6325... – Technical Information — Contents: With screws and plugs. Without conduit clip. ˜

Movement detectors

F

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white black grey dark brazil

565291 565293 565292

1/21 8.4 1/21 8.4 1/21 8.4

Radio frequency 868 MHz Type of transmission: FSK, Frequency Shift Keying, bi-directional, with integrated transmitter and receiver Range: up to 100 m (free field) up to 30 m (building)

Info

˜

Extension The extension between wall bracket and sensor head can be installed for the ARGUS 300 in order to increase the distance between the movement detector and the wall. Obstacles such as downpipes, which blank the area of detection if mounted on corners, can be prevented.

To be completed with: ARGUS 220 art. no. 5654... ARGUS 220 Timer, art. no. 5656... Transmitter: Radio push-button, 2-gang for ARGUS, art. no. System Design 592290. Radio module for ARGUS 220 movement detector, art. no. 565495. Receiver: Radio module for ARGUS 220 movement detector, art. no. 565495.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

Radio module

565495

1/24 8.4

Radio push-button for ARGUS, 2-gang, battery-powered

Length: 11.5 cm To be completed with: ARGUS 300, art. no. 564315/19. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white dark brazil

554399 554395

1/40 8.4 1/40 8.4

Info

For System Design. Battery-powered radio transmitter with 4 pre-programmed channels. For controlling the ARGUS 220 or ARGUS 220 Timer movement detectors, with inserted radio module. High installation flexibility due to flat design. A flush-mounted socket-outlet is not necessary. The push-button is suitable for sticking onto walls or glass, screwing onto walls or flush-mounted outlets as well as installing in a multiple combination.

Info

Functions: The push-button controls the functions permanent ON, permanent OFF, AUTOMATIC and SET (ARGUS 220 Timer only). The ARGUS uses the current twilight threshold for switching on in the SET function. Channels: 4 Range: up to 100 m (free field) up to 30 m (building) Battery: 1 lithium button cell (CR 2450) Display elements: LED for transmission confirmation Type of protection: IP 20 Receiver: Radio module for ARGUS 220 movement detector, art. no. 565495. — Contents: Battery, retaining plate, double-sided adhesive strips, single-sided adhesive strips (aluminium-coloured), screws, dowels. ˜

Version ˜

ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR | Accessories | ©2010

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

polar white

www.merten.com

394

Art. no.

592290

1/40 8

Info


ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR Capacitor AC 230 V, 0.33 µF For use in push-button circuits to prevent flickering of the neon lamp and/or instantaneous switching of the installation relay when several push-buttons with neon lamps are in use. For interference suppression of inductive loads, e.g. relays, contactors, fluorescent lamps, transformers, if the induction voltage of these devices leads to the retriggering of the ARGUS. Version

Art. no.

AC 230 V, 0.33 µF

542895

PU PG

Info

10/450 8

Remote control for ARGUS 220, remote control Radio remote control for triggering the ARGUS 220, remote control 1 ARGUS can be taught per remote control.

Movement detectors

Functions: The following settings can be performed on the ARGUS via the radio remote control: Operating mode (permanent ON, permanent OFF, automatic), brightness threshold, switching duration, set and change the sensitivity to movement.

F

Channels: 1 Radio frequency: 868 MHz Range: up to 100 m (free field) up to 30 m (building) Battery: 1 lithium button cell (CR 2450N) Display elements: Status LED Receiver: ARGUS 220, remote control, art. no. 5655... Accessories from: ARGUS 220, remote control, art. no. 5655... — Contents: With battery. ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

565590

1/100 8.4

Info

www.merten.com

Version

©2010

| Accessories | ARGUS SURFACE-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR

395


ARGUS flush-mounted movement detector

For comfort and safety at every turn

Movement detectors

ARGUS flush-mounted movement detector The ARGUS indoor movement detector saves energy and leaves no one in the dark. The detector can be used to light hallways, entryways, stairways and cellar corridors on demand.

www.merten.de

The functional inserts are available for many different switch series: ARGUS indoor movement detectors are available for the extensive System M switch series, as well as for the System Design, OCTOCOLOR and AQUADESIGN series.

396

The ARGUS indoor movement detector 180/2.20 m FM provides the highest level of security: with an installation height of 2.20 meters, it provides extremely sensitive anti-crawl protection, a broad range, and segments to limit the area of detection.

Convenience, functionality and safety are the key elements to take into account when selecting building technology systems. Energy efficiency is another important criterion. Merten places a high priority on developing sustainable products and solutions in order to protect our resources and the resources of future generations. By employing a movement and presence detector, individual households can also save energy and contribute to environmental protection. Merten products can easily and conveniently reduce energy costs with lighting control, heating and multimedia control tailored to your needs.

ARGUS flush-mounted movement detector | Š2010

ARGUS 180/2.20m flush-mounted movement detector Design 1-M, polar white, glossy


ARGUS flush-mounted movement detector

Contents

Area of detection of the flush-mounted ARGUS 180/2.20m

0,5 m Ca. 12 m

Lateral angle of detection of the flush-mounted ARGUS 180/2.20m Movement detectors

2,20 m 0,5 m

Ca. 8 m

Ca. 8 m

Models available System Design

1-M

M-SMART

M-PLAN real glass

ARTEC

ATELIER-M

M-ARC

M-PLAN metal

TRANCENT

M-SMART

M-PLAN/M-PLAN II

M-STAR

ANTIK

OCTOCOLOR

OCTOCOLOR

Other models

AQUADESIGN

www.merten.de

System M

Š2010

| ARGUS flush-mounted movement detectors

397


ARGUS FLUSH-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR Movement detectorsARGUS flush-mounted movement detectorSecurity electronicsMovement detectorsFlush-mounted movement detectorsARGUS flush-mounted movement detectorG

Technical Information: Flush-mounted movement detector

ARGUS flush-mounted movement detectors

ARGUS 180 / 2.20 m flushmounted sensor module Flush-mounted inserts for ARGUS movement detectors –

For System M. Indoor movement detector with anti-crawl protection.

Technical Information: ARGUS flush-mounted devices overview

Area of detection: 180° Number of levels: 6 Number of zones: 46 Range: 8 m right/left, 12 m to the front Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Light sensor: infinitely adjustable from approx. 5 to approx. 1000 lux Time: adjustable in steps from 1 s to 8 mins Mounting height: 2.2 m or 1.1 m with half the range

Electronic switch insert AC 230 V For ohmic load such as incandescent lamps, 230 V halogen lamps. Switching capacity: 40-300 W Neutral conductor: not required (2 conductor system) To be completed with: ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5755.., 5784.., System Basis 5782.., System Design 5786.., OCTOCOLOR 5753.., AQUADESIGN 5781... ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module with switch, art. no. System M 5728.., 5785.., System Basis 5783.., System Design 5795.., OCTOCOLOR 5756... ARGUS 180/2.20 m flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5688.., 5687... In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT sensor cover for switch inserts art. no. System M 5034.., 5024..., System Design 5044... – Technical Information — Note: A maximum of two electronic switch inserts may be wired in parallel. The insert from version 2A only can be used in conjunction with the CONNECT radio system. ˜

Movement detectors

G

Version

Art. no.

40-300 W

576799

PU PG

Info

1/50 8

To be completed with: Electronic switch insert, art. no. 576799. Relay switch insert, art. no. 576897. – Technical Information — Contents: With cover segments to limit the area of detection. ˜

Version ˜

˜

Art. no.

PU PG 1/50 8

Info

568744 568719 568714 568760

8 8 8 8

For System M. Indoor movement detector. Area of detection: 180° Number of levels: 1 Number of zones: 14 Range: approx. 8 m Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Light sensor: infinitely adjustable between approx. 5 and 1000 lux Time: adjustable in steps from 1 s to 8 min To be completed with: Electronic switch insert, art. no. 576799. Relay switch insert, art. no. 576897. – Technical Information — Note: Supersedes art. no. 5752 .. ˜

Version ˜

PU PG

Info

575544 575519 575525

1/60 8 1/60 8 1/60 8

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium

578444 578419 578414 578460

1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60

8 8 8 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

www.merten.com

˜

Art. no.

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

398

1/40 1/40 1/40 1/40

ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module

˜

576897

1/40 8 1/40 8 1/40 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

Switching capacity: 0-1000 VA Capacitive load: max. 140 µF Neutral conductor: required (3 conductor system)

Version

Info

Thermoplastic classy matt

AC 230 V For ohmic and complex loads such as incandescent lamps, fluorescent lamps, energy-saving lamps, LV halogen lighting etc.

0-1000 VA

568844 568819 568825

white polar white anthracite aluminium

Relay switch insert

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy

˜

To be completed with: ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5755.., 5784.., System Basis 5782.., System Design 5786.., OCTOCOLOR 5753.., AQUADESIGN 5781... ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module with switch, art. no. System M 5728.., 5785.., System Basis 5783.., System Design 5795.., OCTOCOLOR 5756... ARGUS 180/2.20 m flush-mounted sensor module, art. no. System M 5688.., 5687... In the CONNECT radio system with the CONNECT sensor cover for switch inserts art. no. System M 5034.., 5024..., System Design 5044... – Technical Information — Note: Replace the relay switch insert, art. no. 576899.

Art. no.

ARGUS FLUSH-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR | Flush-mounted inserts for ARGUS movement detectors | ©2010


ARGUS FLUSH-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module

ARGUS flush-mounted movement detector with switch

ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module with switch

For System Design. Indoor movement detector.

For System M. Indoor movement detector. With integrated switch for off/automatic/on.

Area of detection: 180° Number of levels: 1 Number of zones: 14 Range: approx. 8 m Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Light sensor: infinitely adjustable between approx. 5 and 1000 lux Time: adjustable in steps from 1 s to 8 min To be completed with: Electronic switch insert, art. no. 576799. Relay switch insert, art. no. 576897. – Technical Information — Antique brass on request. Note: Supersedes art. no. 5787 ..

Area of detection: 180° Number of levels: 1 Number of zones: 14 Range: approx. 8 m Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Light sensor: infinitely adjustable between approx. 5 and 1000 lux Time: adjustable in steps from 1 s to 8 min

˜

Version ˜

Art. no.

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium ˜

PU PG

578644 578619 578629 578615 578669 578660

1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60

578646

1/60 8

To be completed with: Electronic switch insert, art. no. 576799. Relay switch insert, art. no. 576897. – Technical Information — Note: Supersedes art. no. 5759 .. ˜

Version

8 8 8 8 8 8

˜

˜

˜

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white ˜

575344 575319

1/60 8 1/60 8

575342

1/60 8

575305

1/60 8

G

8 8 8 8

Area of detection: 180° Number of levels: 1 Number of zones: 14 Range: approx. 8 m Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Light sensor: infinitely adjustable between approx. 5 and 1000 lux Time: adjustable in steps from 1 s to 8 min To be completed with: Electronic switch insert, art. no. 576799. Relay switch insert, art. no. 576897. – Technical Information — Note: Supersedes art. no. 5792 .. ˜

Version

metallic

varnished bronze metallic varnished titanium

1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60

˜

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium ˜

Art. no.

579544 579519 579529 579515 579569 579560

1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60

8 8 8 8 8 8

579546

1/60 8

metallic

varnished stainless steel

www.merten.com

˜

578544 578519 578514 578560

For System Design. Indoor movement detector. With integrated switch for off/automatic/on.

To be completed with: Electronic switch insert, art. no. 576799. Relay switch insert, art. no. 576897. – Technical Information — Note: Supersedes art. no. 5794 .. Info

Movement detectors

ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module with switch

˜

PU PG

1/60 8 1/60 8 1/60 8

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

Area of detection: 180° Number of levels: 1 Number of zones: 12 Range: approx. 8 m Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Light sensor: infinitely adjustable between approx. 5 and 1000 lux Time: adjustable in steps from 1 s to 8 min

Art. no.

Info

Thermoplastic classy matt

For OCTOCOLOR. Indoor movement detector.

Version

572844 572819 572825

white polar white anthracite aluminium

ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy

metallic

varnished stainless steel

Art. no.

©2010

| ARGUS flush-mounted movement detector with switch | ARGUS FLUSH-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR

399


ARGUS FLUSH-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module with switch

ARGUS movement detector, KNX

KNX ARGUS 180, flush-mounted

For OCTOCOLOR. Indoor movement detector. With integrated switch for off/automatic/on.

For System M. Movement detector for indoors. When a movement is detected, a data telegram defined by the programming is transmitted. With integrated bus coupling unit.

Area of detection: 180° Number of levels: 1 Number of zones: 12 Range: approx. 8 m Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Light sensor: infinitely adjustable between approx. 5 and 1000 lux Time: adjustable in steps from 1 s to 8 min

KNX software functions: Five movement blocks: up to four functions can be triggered per block. Telegrams: 1 bit, 1 byte, 2 bytes. Normal operation, master, slave, safety pause, disable function. Sensitivity, brightness and staircase timer can be set using the ETS or the potentiometer. Self-adjusting staircase timer.

To be completed with: Electronic switch insert, art. no. 576799. Relay switch insert, art. no. 576897. – Technical Information — Note: Supersedes art. no. 5793 .. ˜

Version ˜

Art. no.

˜

575644 575619

1/60 8 1/60 8

575642

1/60 8

575605

1/60 8

metallic

varnished bronze metallic varnished titanium

G

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white Movement detectors

PU PG

Angle of detection: 180° Range: 8 m (for mounting height of 1.1 m) Number of levels: 1 Number of zones: 14 Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable (ETS or potentiometer) Light sensor: infinitely adjustable from approx. 10 to 2000 Lux (ETS or potentiometer) Time: adjustable in steps from 1 s to 8 min (potentiometer) or adjustable from 1 s to 255 hours (ETS) EC Directives: Low-voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC —

ARGUS flush-mounted movement detectors, waterproof

Version ˜

• Protection type IP 44.

Contents: With bus connecting terminal and supporting plate.

For AQUADESIGN. Splash-proof movement detector. Area of detection: 180° Number of levels: 1 Number of zones: 14 Range: approx. 8 m Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable Light sensor: infinitely adjustable between approx. 5 and 1000 lux Time: adjustable in steps from 1 s to 8 min

˜

631644 631619 631625

632644 632619 632614 632660

To be completed with: Electronic switch insert, art. no. 576799. Relay switch insert, art. no. 576897. – Technical Information Art. no. 578144 578119 578115 578114 578160

PU PG 1/50 1/50 1/50 1/50 1/50

Info

8 8 8 8 8

www.merten.com

Version

400

1/30 9 1/30 9 1/30 9

1/30 1/30 1/30 1/30

9 9 9 9

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

˜

white polar white dark brazil anthracite aluminium

Info

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy

ARGUS 180 flush-mounted sensor module

Art. no.

ARGUS FLUSH-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR | ARGUS flush-mounted movement detectors, waterproof | ©2010


ARGUS FLUSH-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR KNX ARGUS 180/2.20 m flushmounted

KNX ARGUS 180, flush-mounted For System Design. Movement detector for indoors. When a movement is detected, a data telegram defined by the programming is transmitted. With integrated bus coupling unit.

For System M. Indoor movement detector with anti-crawl protection. When a movement is detected, a data telegram defined by the programming is transmitted. With integrated bus coupling unit. For wall mounting in a size 60 mounting box, optimal installation at 2.2 m.

KNX software functions: Five movement blocks: up to four functions can be triggered per block. Telegrams: 1 bit, 1 byte, 2 bytes. Normal operation, master, slave, safety pause, disable function. Sensitivity, brightness and staircase timer can be set using the ETS or the potentiometer. Self-adjusting staircase timer.

KNX software functions: Five movement blocks: up to four functions can be triggered per block. Telegrams: 1 bit, 1 byte, 2 bytes. Normal operation, master, slave, safety pause, disable function. Sensitivity, brightness and staircase timer can be set using the ETS or the potentiometer. Two movement sensors: the sensitivity and range can be set separately for each sensor. Self-adjusting staircase timer. Angle of detection: 180° Range: 8 m right/left, 12 m to the front (for a mounting height of 2.20 m) Mounting height: 2.2 m or 1.1 m with half the range Number of levels: 6 Number of zones: 46 Number of movement sensors: 2, sector-orientated, adjustable Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable (ETS or potentiometer) Light sensor: infinitely adjustable from approx. 10 to 2000 Lux (ETS or potentiometer) Time: adjustable in steps from 1 s to 8 min (potentiometer) or adjustable from 1 s to 255 hours (ETS) EC Directives: Low-voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC

Info

631844 631819 631860

1/30 9 1/30 9 1/30 9

631846

1/30 9

metallic

varnished stainless steel

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

631744 631719 631725

1/30 9 1/30 9 1/30 9

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white aluminium ˜

Art. no.

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Version ˜

G

Contents: With bus connecting terminal and supporting plate.

Contents: With bus connecting terminal and supporting plate.With cover segments to limit the area of detection.

Version ˜

Movement detectors

632744 632719 632714 632760

1/30 1/30 1/30 1/30

9 9 9 9

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

www.merten.com

Angle of detection: 180° Range: 8 m (for mounting height of 1.1 m) Number of levels: 1 Number of zones: 14 Sensitivity: infinitely adjustable (ETS or potentiometer) Light sensor: infinitely adjustable from approx. 10 to 2000 Lux (ETS or potentiometer) Time: adjustable in steps from 1 s to 8 min (potentiometer) or adjustable from 1 s to 255 hours (ETS) EC Directives: Low-voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC

©2010

| ARGUS movement detector, KNX | ARGUS FLUSH-MOUNTED MOVEMENT DETECTOR

401


ARGUS presence detector

EFFICIENT AND INTELLIGENT

Presence detectors

ARGUS presence detector

www.merten.de

Two key elements in planning modern buildings are energy-efficiency and sustainability – and intelligent building systems are key to creating efficient, safe, and forward-looking buildings. The ARGUS presence detector is a reliable partner for controlling lighting, heating, and ventilation in individual rooms according to need.

402

The light is automatically controlled via the first channel. The ARGUS presence detector measures the intensity of the natural light. If brightness has fallen below a preselected light threshold, the smallest movements in the room are sufficient to switch on the lighting automatically. When there is enough natural light or when the room is empty, the presence detector turns off the light. The second channel provides presence-based control of other units such as heating or ventilation con-

ARGUS presence detector | ©2010

nected to channel 1, independently of the first channel. KNX ARGUS Presence 180/2.20 m FM The KNX ARGUS Presence 180/2.20 m FM is ideal when the detector can not be installed on the ceiling. The detector can be installed flush-mounted or flush to the wall, making it an unobtrusive and harmonious element of the room's design – the KNX ARGUS Presence 180/2.20 m FM is available in the System M switch designs. KNX ARGUS Presence With five channels and four sensor areas, which can be assigned to different channels, the KNX ARGUS Presence provides highly individualised convenience. For example, if movement is detected in area A,

only the copier lighting is switched on. However, if a presence is detected in areas B through D, the KNX ARGUS Presence will switch on the light in the entire space.

By employing a movement and presence detector, individual households can also save energy and contribute to environmental protection. Merten products can easily and conveniently reduce energy costs with lighting control, heating and multimedia control tailored to your needs.


ARGUS presence detector

Contents

KNX ARGUS Presence Basic

• with 2 channels • now also available in the colour aluminium

KNX ARGUS Presence

• same as KNX ARGUS Presence Basic but with 5 channels • 4 separately adjustable sensor ranges • now also available in the colour aluminium

ARGUS Presence

Presence detectors

• for offices, corridors and schools

KNX ARGUS Presence with light control and IR receiver

• same as KNX ARGUS Presence, plus: • lighting control channel • IR receiver can be used for configuration or remote control of KNX functions • now also available in the colour aluminium

• same as ARGUS Presence, plus: • permanent ON, OFF and AUTOMATIC functions can be remote controlled • lighting can be switched on manually by using the extension input push-button

ARGUS Presence system

KNX ARGUS Presence 180/2.20 m, flush-mounted

www.merten.de

• 2 separate sensor areas • 5 channels, each with 4 output objects • for wall mounting • in System M design

• for the uninterrupted monitoring of large offices and long corridors • up to 8 sensor heads can be switched in sequence (to monitor rooms and corridors up to 64 m) • lighting can be switched on manually by using the extension input push-button

©2010

| ARGUS presence detector

403


ARGUS PRESENCE DETECTORS Technical Information: ARGUS Presence

ARGUS Presence system sensor

ARGUS Presence system

Sensor head with prefabricated interconnecting cable for extending the ARGUS Presence system. Each sensor head has two plugs allowing through-wiring to other sensors.

Presence detectorsARGUS presence detectorsSecurity electronicsPresence detectorsARGUS presence detectorsH

Interconnecting cable: 8 m long Angle of detection: 360° Range: a radius of max. 4 m from the installation site (at a mounting height of 2.50 m) Number of levels: 5 Number of zones: 71 with 284 switching segments Light sensor: infinitely adjustable between approx. 10 and 1000 lux. The light sensor is not active in the test position. EC guidelines: Low voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC

Technical Information: ARGUS Presence system

ARGUS Presence system Indoor presence detection. The system detects the slightest movement in the room, switches the light on and leaves it on until no further movement is detected or natural lighting is sufficient. The power unit has two relay outputs: Relay 1: For brightness-dependent movement detection, e.g. lighting. The overshoot time is infinitely adjustable at the sensor within a range of between 10 seconds and 30 minutes. The device constantly monitors the brightness in the room. Then, when there is sufficient natural light, the artificial light is switched off even if there is still someone in the room. The relay switches phase L. Relay 2: Floating contact (electrically isolated). For movement detection independent of brightness e.g. ventilation or heating control. The overshoot time is infinitely adjustable at the sensor within a range of between 5 minutes and 2 hours. The system consists of the sensor head and a power unit with a permanently attached interconnecting cable (length 2.5 m) plugged into the sensor head. Every sensor head has two sockets to enable through-wiring. A maximum of 8 sensor heads (art. no. 550419) can be connected in this way to one power unit (master-slave principle). Installing several sensor heads makes it possible to seamlessly monitor long corridors and large rooms for example. The sensor head that registered the last movement determines the overshoot time. Can also be controlled via an extension input. Sensor heads are installed in 68 mm ceiling openings. Areas of use include: offices, schools, public buildings, homes. Optimum installation height of 2.50 m.

Presence detectors

H

www.merten.com

Mains voltage: AC 230 V ± 10%, 50 Hz Connecting cable: 2.5 m Max. switching current per relay: 10 A, AC 230 V, cos = 0,6 Incandescent lamps: max. 2300 W Halogen lamps: max. 2000 W Motor load: max. 1000 W Capacitive load: max. 140 µF Power consumption: 2 W for 8 sensors Angle of detection: 360° Range: a radius of max. 4 m from the installation site (at a mounting height of 2.50 m) Number of levels: 5 Number of zones: 71 with 284 switching segments Light sensor: infinitely adjustable between approx. 10 and 1000 lux. The light sensor is not active in the test position. EC guidelines: Low voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC

404

˜ –

Accessories: ARGUS Presence system sensor, art. no. 550419. Technical Information

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white

550499

1/6 8.4

Info

ARGUS PRESENCE DETECTORS | ARGUS Presence system | ©2010

˜ –

To be completed with: ARGUS Presence system, art. no. 550499. Technical Information

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white

550419

1/6 8.4

Info


ARGUS PRESENCE DETECTORS

ARGUS Presence

ARGUS Presence with IR receiver and for extension unit operation

• Indoor presence detection. • ARGUS switches on the light and leaves it switched on until presence is no longer detected or the ambient brightness is sufficient. Can be used in offices, schools, public buildings or homes, for example. The detector is installed in or on the ceiling. • For installation on the ceiling in a 60 mm installation box. Optimum height 2.50 m. • The surface-mounted housing, art. no. 550619, allows the presence detector to be mounted on non-suspended ceilings.

When connecting the nominal voltage or shortterm interruption of the power supply (e.g. with a push-button connected as a make contact), the device switches channel 1 on for one minute plus the set time, regardless of the level of light. Other features and attributes as for ARGUS Presence, art. no. 550590. For channel 1, the functions "Permanent ON", "Permanent OFF" and "Automatic" can be controlled with the IR remote control. Accessories: Surface-mounted housing for ARGUS Presence, art. no. 550619. Transmitter: IR remote control Distance, art. no. 570222. – Technical Information ˜

Technical Information: ARGUS Presence

ARGUS Presence The device has 2 relay outputs: Relay 1: For brightness-dependent movement detection, e.g. lighting. The overshoot time is infinitely adjustable within a range of between 10 seconds and 30 minutes. ARGUS Presence constantly monitors the brightness in the room. Then, when there is sufficient natural light, the artificial light is switched off even if there is still someone in the room. Relay 2: For movement detection independent of brightness e.g. ventilation or heating control. The overshoot time is infinitely adjustable between 5 minutes and 2 hours.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white

550591

1/6 8.4

Info

Presence detectors

H

Mains voltage: AC 230 V ±10 %, 50 Hz Relay 1 (sole use): Nominal capacity: max. 1000 W/VA, 5 A, cos = 1 5 A, cos = 0.6 Incandescent lamps: 1000 W 230 V halogen: 1000 W LV halogen: 500 W with conventional transformer Capacitive load: 5 A, 140 µF Fluorescent lamps: 5 A, 140 µF; 1000 W, uncompensated; 1000 W, 140 µF parallel compensation; 2x500 W, twin-lamp circuit; Electronic ballast: 5 A, Cmax  140 µF Minimum load: 10 mA,  DC 24 V Relay 2 (sole use): Nominal capacity: max. 1000 W, cos = 1 Relays 1+2 (combined use): Nominal capacity: max. 1000 VA, cos = 0.6 and max. 750 W halogen 230 V Fuse: T5H Power consumption: < 1 W Angle of detection: 360° Range: a radius of max. 7 m from the installation site (at a mounting height of 2.50 m) Number of levels: 6 Number of zones: 136 with 544 switching segments Light sensor: infinitely adjustable between approx. 10 and 1000 lux. The light sensor is not active in the test position. EC guidelines: Low voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC Accessories: Surface-mounted housing for ARGUS Presence, art. no. 550619. – Technical Information Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white

550590

1/6 8.4

www.merten.com

˜

Info

©2010

| ARGUS Presence | ARGUS PRESENCE DETECTORS

405


ARGUS PRESENCE DETECTORS KNX ARGUS Presence

KNX ARGUS Presence

Presence detection indoors. If KNX ARGUS Presence detects smaller movements in the room, data telegrams are transmitted via KNX to control the lighting, blind or heating at the same time. When the lighting is controlled by brightnessdependent movement detection, the device constantly monitors the brightness in the room. If sufficient natural light is at hand, the device switches the artificial light off even if a person is present. The overshoot time can be adjusted using the ETS. With integrated bus coupling unit. For ceiling mounting in a size 60 mounting box, optimal installation at 2.5 m. Can also be mounted to ceilings using the surface mounting housing for ARGUS Presence.

• ARGUS Presence switches on the light and leaves it switched on until it can no longer detect the presence of people or there is sufficient natural daylight. • Its areas of application include offices, schools, public buildings and private interiors.

KNX ARGUS Presence Basic Presence detection indoors. If KNX ARGUS Presence detects smaller movements in the room, data telegrams are transmitted via KNX to control the lighting, blind or heating at the same time. When the lighting is controlled by brightnessdependent movement detection, the device constantly monitors the brightness in the room. If sufficient natural light is at hand, the device switches the artificial light off even if a person is present. The overshoot time can be adjusted using the ETS. With integrated bus coupling unit. For ceiling mounting in a size 60 mounting box, optimal installation at 2.5 m. Can also be mounted to ceilings using the surface mounting housing for ARGUS Presence.

KNX software functions: Five movement/presence blocks: up to four functions can be triggered per block. Telegrams: 1 bit, 1 byte, 2 bytes. Normal operation, master, slave, monitoring, safety pause, disable function. Four movement sensors: the sensitivity and range can be set separately for each sensor. Self-adjusting staircase timer. Actual brightness value: can be detected via the internal and/or an external light sensor. Actual value correction.

KNX software functions: Two movement/presence blocks: up to four functions can be triggered per block. Telegrams: 1 bit, 1 byte, 2 bytes. Normal operation (no master/slave), safety pause, disable function. Self-adjusting staircase timer. Actual brightness value: can be specified via the internal and/or an external light sensor.

Presence detectors

H

Angle of detection: 360° Range: a radius of max. 7 m (at a mounting height of 2.50 m) Number of levels: 6 Number of zones: 136 with 544 switching segments Number of movement sensors: 4 Light sensor: internal light sensor infinitely adjustable from approx. 10 to 2000 Lux (ETS); external light sensor via KNX EC Directives: Low-voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC Accessories: Surface-mounted housing for ARGUS Presence, art. no. 550619. — Contents: With bus connecting terminal and supporting plate. ˜

Art. no. 630719 630760

PU PG

Info

1/6 9 1/6 9

www.merten.com

Version polar white aluminium

406

ARGUS PRESENCE DETECTORS | KNX ARGUS Presence | ©2010

Angle of detection: 360° Range: a radius of max. 7 m (at a mounting height of 2.50 m) Number of levels: 6 Number of zones: 136 with 544 switching segments Number of movement sensors: 4, separately adjustable Light sensor: internal light sensor infinitely adjustable from approx. 10 to 2000 Lux (ETS); external light sensor via KNX EC Directives: Low-voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC Accessories: Surface-mounted housing for ARGUS Presence, art. no. 550619. — Contents: With bus connecting terminal and supporting plate. ˜

Version

Art. no.

polar white aluminium

630819 630860

PU PG 1/6 9 1/6 9

Info


ARGUS PRESENCE DETECTORS KNX ARGUS Presence with light control and IR receiver

KNX ARGUS Presence 180/ 2.20 m flush-mounted

Presence detection indoors. If KNX ARGUS Presence detects smaller movements in the room, data telegrams are transmitted via KNX to control the lighting, blind or heating at the same time. When the lighting is controlled by brightnessdependent movement detection, the device constantly monitors the brightness in the room. If sufficient natural light is at hand, the device switches the artificial light off even if a person is present. The overshoot time can be adjusted using the ETS. Light control enables the required brightness in a room to be achieved permanently. Dimming and the optional use of a second lighting group maintains a constant brightness. Individual ARGUS Presence configurations can be changed or other KNX devices can be controlled remotely using the IR receiver. With integrated bus coupling unit. For ceiling mounting in a size 60 mounting box, optimal installation at 2.5 m. Can also be mounted to ceilings using the surface mounting housing for ARGUS Presence.

For System M. Presence detection indoors. If KNX ARGUS Presence detects smaller movements in the room, data telegrams are transmitted via KNX to control the lighting, blind or heating at the same time. When the lighting is controlled by brightnessdependent movement detection, the device constantly monitors the brightness in the room. If sufficient natural light is at hand, the device switches the artificial light off even if a person is present. The overshoot time can be adjusted using the ETS. With integrated bus coupling unit. For wall mounting in a size 60 mounting box, optimal installation at 2.2 m. With anti-crawl protection. KNX software functions: Five movement/presence blocks: up to four functions can be triggered per block. Telegrams: 1 bit, 1 byte, 2 bytes. Normal operation, master, slave, monitoring, safety pause, disable function. Two movement sensors: the sensitivity and range can be set separately for each sensor. Self-adjusting staircase timer. Actual brightness value: can be detected via the internal and/or an external light sensor. Actual value correction.

KNX software functions: Five movement/presence blocks: up to four functions can be triggered per block. Telegrams: 1 bit, 1 byte, 2 bytes. An additional light control block: brightness can be maintained constant by dimming and an additional adjustable level. IR receiver function. IR configuration: setting the brightness threshold, staircase timer factors or range. Normal operation, master, slave, monitoring, safety pause, disable function. Four movement sensors: the sensitivity and range can be set separately for each sensor. Self-adjusting staircase timer. Actual brightness value: can be detected via the internal and/or an external light sensor. Actual value correction. Angle of detection: 360° Range: a radius of max. 7 m (at a mounting height of 2.50 m) Number of levels: 6 Number of zones: 136 with 544 switching segments Number of movement sensors: 4, separately adjustable Light sensor: internal light sensor infinitely adjustable from approx. 10 to 2000 Lux (ETS); external light sensor via KNX Number of IR channels: 10 for controlling KNX devices, 10 for configuration EC Directives: Low-voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC Accessories: Surface-mounted housing for ARGUS Presence, art. no. 550619. Transmitter: IR remote control Distance, art. no. 570222. CONNECT radio universal remote control art. no. 506923. — Contents: With bus connecting terminal and supporting plate. ˜

Art. no. 630919 630960

PU PG

Contents: With bus connecting terminal and supporting plate.With cover segments to limit the area of detection.

Version ˜

Art. no.

Info

630444 630419 630425

1/30 9 1/30 9 1/30 9

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

H

630644 630619 630614 630660

1/30 1/30 1/30 1/30

9 9 9 9

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

Info

1/6 9 1/6 9

www.merten.com

Version polar white aluminium

Presence detectors

Angle of detection: 180° Range: 8 m right/left, 12 m to the front (for a mounting height of 2.20 m) Mounting height: 2.2 m or 1.1 m at half the range Time: adjustable in steps from 1 s to 8 min (potentiometer) or adjustable from 1 s to 255 hours (ETS) Number of levels: 6 Number of zones: 46 Number of movement sensors: 2, separately adjustable Light sensor: internal light sensor infinitely adjustable from approx. 10 to 2000 Lux (ETS); external light sensor via KNX EC Directives: Low-voltage guideline 2006/95/ EC and EMC guideline 2004/108/EC

©2010

| KNX ARGUS Presence | ARGUS PRESENCE DETECTORS

407


ARGUS PRESENCE DETECTORS Accessories

Surface-mounted housing for ARGUS Presence The surface-mounted housing for ARGUS Presence devices also allows them to be surface mounted. To be completed with: ARGUS Presence, art. no. 550590/91. KNX ARGUS Presence Basic art. no. 6307... KNX ARGUS Presence art. no. 6308... KNX ARGUS Presence with light control and IR receiver art. no. 6309... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white

550619

1/21 8.4

Presence detectors

www.merten.com

H

408

ARGUS PRESENCE DETECTORS | Accessories | ©2010

Info


ARGUS PRESENCE DETECTORS

Presence detectors

www.merten.com

H

©2010

| Accessories | ARGUS PRESENCE DETECTORS

409


ARGUS light-sensitive switch

EFFICIENT SWITCHING

Light-sensitive switch

ARGUS light-sensitive time switch

Two Merten ARGUS light-sensitive switches can be used to illuminate outdoor spaces on demand. The ARGUS Compact light-sensitive switch has a preset switch-on and switch-off threshold, while the ARGUS light sensitive switch provides maximum flexibility with adjustable switching thresholds and higher switching capacity. The latter is also externally adjustable.

The ARGUS light-sensitive time switch combines a light-sensitive switch and a time switch in a single unit. Combining two technologies in one solution with a light-sensitive switch coupled to a time switch can lead to even greater energy savings. Depending on the season, the ARGUS light-sensitive time switch turns on the lights at dusk, and turns them off again at a preset time. The integrated clock component automatically synchronises the time â&#x20AC;&#x201C; an especially useful feature, especially in the event of a power failure.

www.merten.de

ARGUS light-sensitive switch

410

ARGUS light-sensitive switches | Š2010

Convenience, functionality and safety are the key elements to take into account when selecting building technology systems. Energy efficiency is another important criterion. Merten places a high priority on developing sustainable products and solutions in order to protect our resources and the resources of future generations. By employing a movement and presence detector, individual households can also save energy and contribute to environmental protection. Merten products can easily and conveniently reduce energy costs with lighting control, heating and multimedia control tailored to your needs.


ARGUS light-sensitive switch

Contents

ARGUS light-sensitive time switch

Light-sensitive switch

ARGUS light-sensitive switches: The right solution for any application ARGUS light-sensitive switch 1100

• Fixed brightness threshold • Switching delay

ARGUS light-sensitive time switch

• Brightness threshold can be set externally between 2 and 300 lux • Integrated time switch function

ARGUS light-sensitive switch

www.merten.de

• Brightness threshold can be set externally between 3 and 2,000 lux • Switching delay

©2010

| ARGUS light-sensitive switches

411


ARGUS LIGHT-SENSITIVE SWITCHES Light-sensitive switchARGUS light-sensitive switchesSecurity electronicsLight-sensitive switchesARGUS light-sensitive switchesI

Technical Information: ARGUS light-sensitive switch

ARGUS light-sensitive switches

ARGUS compact light-sensitive switch ARGUS light-sensitive time switch

AC 230 V Waterproof surface-mounted device with fixed switch threshold.

ARGUS light-sensitive time switch AC 230 V Waterproof surface-mounted device with impactresistant housing. With time function. The light-sensitive time switch combines the functions of a light-sensitive switch and a time switch in a single device. Choose from between three functions: Twilight function: The lighting is switched on in the evening and switched off in the morning when the appropriate pre-set twilight threshold is reached. Automatic function: In the evening, the light is switched on when the pre-set twilight threshold is reached and switched off again at a pre-set time (e.g. 11.00 p.m.). In the morning, the lighting is switched on at a pre-set time (e.g. 5.00 a.m.) and switched off again when the twilight threshold is reached. Semi-automatic function: In the evening, the light is switched on when the pre-set twilight threshold is reached and switched off again at a pre-set time (e.g. 11.00 p.m.). A special integrated function ensures that the time is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness. It is not necessary to set the time manually. Relay with µ contact. High sensitivity to light. Automatic time adjustment. Large wiring compartment.

Light-sensitive switch

I

Connected load: up to 1100 VA Max. switching current: 5 A ohmic, 2.5 A inductive at cos = 0.5 Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, up to 200 W Capacitive load: max. 21 µF Adjustment range/switch threshold: On: 4 to 7 lux Off: 6 to 18 lux Switching delay - when switching on: approx. 25 s to 45 s - when switching off: approx. 30 s to 65 s Dimensions: approx. 81 x 70 x 45 mm ˜ –

Accessories: Capacitor, art. no. 542895. Technical Information

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

light grey

544529

1/45 8.4

ARGUS light-sensitive switch AC 230 V Waterproof surface-mounted device with impactresistant housing. Reinforced relay. High sensitivity to light. Large wiring compartment. Connected load: up to 2300 VA Max. switching current: AC 230 V, 10 A, cos = 0.6 Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, up to 2000 W Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, up to 2300 W Capacitive load: max. 140 µF Connecting terminals: for 2.5 mm2 rigid conductors Adjustment range/switch threshold: 3 to 2000 lux, adjustable Switching delay - when switching on: approx. 40 s - when switching off: approx. 100 s Dimensions: approx. 97x80x47 mm

Connected load: up to 2300 VA Max. switching current: AC 230 V, 10 A cos = 0.6 Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, up to 2000 W Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, up to 2300 W Capacitive load: max. 140 µF Connecting terminals: for 2.5 mm2 rigid conductors Adjustment range/switch threshold: 2 to 300 lux, adjustable Dimensions: approx. 97 x 80 x 47 mm ˜ –

Accessories: Capacitor, art. no. 542895. Technical Information Art. no.

PU PG

544890

1/35 8.4

˜ –

Info

412

Accessories: Capacitor, art. no. 542895. Technical Information

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

with switching delay, polar white

544819

1/35 8.4

www.merten.com

Version light grey

Info

ARGUS LIGHT-SENSITIVE SWITCHES | ARGUS light-sensitive time switch | ©2010

Info


ARGUS LIGHT-SENSITIVE SWITCHES ARGUS light-sensitive switch AC 230 V Waterproof surface-mounted device with impactresistant housing. Reinforced relay. High sensitivity to light. Large wiring compartment. Connected load: up to 2300 VA Max. switching current: AC 230 V, 10 A, cos = 0.6 Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, up to 2000 W Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, up to 2300 W Capacitive load: max. 140 µF Connecting terminals: for 2.5 mm2 rigid conductors Adjustment range/switch threshold: 3 to 2000 lux, adjustable Switching delay - when switching on: approx. 40 s - when switching off: approx. 100 s Dimensions: approx. 97x80x47 mm ˜ –

Accessories: Capacitor, art. no. 542895. Technical Information

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

without switching delay, light grey with switching delay, light grey

544829

1/35 8.4

544894

1/35 8.4

Info

Accessories

Light-sensitive switch

Capacitor

I

AC 230 V, 0.33 µF For use in push-button circuits to prevent flickering of the neon lamp and/or instantaneous switching of the installation relay when several push-buttons with neon lamps are in use. For interference suppression of inductive loads, e.g. relays, contactors, fluorescent lamps, transformers, if the induction voltage of these devices leads to the retriggering of the ARGUS. Art. no. 542895

PU PG

Info

10/450 8

www.merten.com

Version AC 230 V, 0.33 µF

©2010

| Accessories | ARGUS LIGHT-SENSITIVE SWITCHES

413


LIFE-SAVER IN AN ATTRACTIVE DESIGN

Smoke detectors

ARGUS smoke detector system More than 600 people still lose their lives each year due to smoke inhalation during a household fire in Germany. Many German states now require smoke detectors in private homes. However, many households still are not equipped with a smoke detector.

www.merten.de

Every Merten smoke detector is suitable for use in living areas, and is easy to mount directly to the ceiling. A light display depicts the device's current status. The entire ARGUS smoke detector family has been approved by the German Property Insurers' Association (VdS).

414

The ARGUS smoke detector family is comprised of five different models offering the best performance for every use â&#x20AC;&#x201C; from installation of single smoke detectors to radio-controlled solutions. The flush-mounted system relay for ARGUS smoke detectors provides the highest level of safety. The system relay links the ARGUS smoke detector system with external devices such as sirens or signal lamps.

ARGUS Smoke Detector Basic Longlife polar white

Flush-mounted system relay for ARGUS smoke detector ARGUS smoke detector system | Š2010


Argus smoke detector system

Contents

ARGUS smoke detectors: the right solution for any application ARGUS basic longlife smoke detector

• the good-value-for-money smoke detector as an individual solution • operated with a 9 V battery • Battery service life: approx. 2.5 years

• the good-value-for-money smoke detector as an individual solution • operated with 9 V lithium longlife batteries • Battery service life: approx. 10 years

Recommended for use in: suites / single-storey flats

Recommended for use in: suites / single-storey flats

ARGUS CONNECT smoke detector

ARGUS 230 V smoke detector

• radio-networked smoke detector solution for retrofitting your entire home • Networking options: • Radio network – with an integrated radio module • Wired networking – wired networking is effected via a separate 2-wire cable (SELV). • battery-powered with 9 V battery (battery service life: approx. 2.5 years)

• one of the flattest mains-operated 230 V smoke detectors with large wiring compartment • integrated battery provides functional reliability during power failure • with integrated networking options: up to 25 wired smoke detectors • easy to maintain due to mains supply • Networked using 1 additional core in 230 V network • including surface-mounted base

Recommended for use in: existing single-family house/retrofitting

Recommended for use in: new, single-family homes

• radio-networked smoke detector solution for new homes • Networking options: • Radio network – with an integrated radio module • Wired networking – wired networking is carried out via a separate core in the 230 V network. • Easy to maintain due to mains supply • including surface-mounted base

Recommended for use in: new, single-family homes

Flush-mounted system relay

• integration of external signal sources such as sirens, flashlights, vibrating cushions, etc. • space-saving flush mounting or in direct proximity to the connected signal sources • connection via 230 V power supply • up to 160 smoke detectors can be integrated in 16 radio cells • option of integrating into the Merten CONNECT radio system via a CONNECT radio transmitter • signal is forwarded to KNX installations via a binary input

www.merten.de

ARGUS CONNECT 230 V smoke detector

Smoke detectors

©2010

| ARGUS smoke detector system

415


ARGUS SMOKE DETECTORS ARGUS smoke detector Connect

Smoke detectorARGUS smoke detectorsSecurity electronicsSmoke detectorsARGUS smoke detectorsJ

Technical Information: ARGUS smoke detector

Battery-powered radio smoke detector for early detection of smouldering fires and development of smoke with open fires indoors. Networking options: • Radio network (with integrated radio module) • Wired network Wired networking is effected via a separate 2wire cable (SELV). Functions: • Self-test • Continuous battery monitoring. A weak battery is displayed via an acoustic signal as well as a flashing LED. • Push-button for functional test

ARGUS smoke detector All ARGUS smoke detectors are with VdS approval! • BOSEC certification • Awaiting CoMo certification • Approved in accordance with EN 14676 The smoke detectors operate in accordance to the scattered light principle and detects smoke before the concentration of smoke becomes dangerous for people. This is signalled by a loud warning tone (about 85 db(A)) and an LED. In networked systems: • A detector detects smoke and then the alarm is set off by all connected smoke alarms. Combination Connect smoke detector and Connect 230 V: • Radio networking is possible Mounting options: • Directly on the ceiling with the screws and plugs supplied • with a central screw • On flush-mounted and cavity wall boxes An installed smoke detector system (Art. no. 6634.., 6637.., 663491) can be extended with smoke detectors with radio networking and 2-wire cable networking.

Functional principle: scattered light (Tyndall effect) Sensitivity: in accordance with EN 14604 Battery type: 9 V monobloc battery, IEC 6LR61, alkali Battery failure signal: approx. every 40 seconds, for at least 30 days Battery life: approx. 2.5 years Signal: approx. 85 dB(A) at 3 m distance Display elements: red LED Network: max. 40 smoke detectors Network cable: type J-Y(St)Y 2x2x0.6 Total cable length: up to 500 m Cable length between two detectors: max. 25 m Radio frequency: 868 MHz Transmission range: up to 100 m in free field, up to 30 m indoors Radio operating elements: DIP switch for addressing/grouping Operating ambient temperature: 0 °C to 60 °C Dimensions: 112 x 44 mm (Ø x H) Type of protection: IP 42 With VdS approval Accessories: Sealing pins for ARGUS smoke detector, Art. No. 547000. Flush-mounted system relay for ARGUS smoke detector, art. no. 548001. — Note: Not compatible with Merten CONNECT radio system. The wired connection of the ARGUS smoke detector 230 V/Connect 230 V art. no. 5475.., 5485 is not permitted. With pipe cabling systems a gasket must be installed on site between the ceiling and the smoke detector. Contents: Battery.Screws and plugs. ˜

Smoke detector

www.merten.com

J

416

ARGUS SMOKE DETECTORS | ARGUS smoke detector | ©2010

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white aluminium

548019 548060

1/10 8.3 1/10 8.3

Info


ARGUS SMOKE DETECTORS ARGUS smoke detector Connect 230 V

ARGUS smoke detector 230 V Mains-powered smoke detector with backup battery for early detection of smouldering fires and open fires with smoke build-up indoors. Up to 25 smoke detectors can be wired to a network. Wired networking is carried out via a separate wire in the 230 V network. Functions: • Self-test • Continuous battery monitoring. A weak battery is displayed via an acoustic signal as well as a flashing LED. • Push-button for functional test

Mains-powered radio smoke detector with backup battery for early detection of smouldering fires and smoke build-up indoors with open fires. Networking options: • Radio network (with integrated radio module) • Wired network Wired networking is via a separate core in the 230 V network. Functions: • Self-test • Continuous battery monitoring. A weak battery is displayed via an acoustic signal as well as a flashing LED. • Push-button for functional test Functional principle: scattered light (Tyndall effect) Sensitivity: in accordance with EN 14604 Supply voltage: AC 230 V, 50 Hz Battery type: 9 V monobloc battery, IEC 6LR61, alkali Battery failure signal: approx. every 40 seconds, for at least 30 days Battery life: With a 230 V power supply: approx. every 4-5 years, dependent on the self discharge of the battery installed When battery-operated only: approx. 2.5 years. Signal: approx. 85 dB(A) at 3 m distance Display elements: 2 LEDs (red, green) Network: max. 40 smoke detectors Network cable: separate, free core e.g. 1 x 1.5 mm2 in 230 V network Connecting terminals: each 2 x 2.5 mm2, looping possible Total cable length: up to 500 m Cable length between two detectors: max. 25 m Radio frequency: 868 MHz Transmission range: up to 100 m in free field, up to 30 m indoors Radio operating elements: DIP switch for addressing/grouping Operating ambient temperature: 0 °C to 60 °C Dimensions: 112 x 44 mm (Ø x H); with surface mounting base 112 x 59 mm (Ø x H) Type of protection: IP 42 With VdS approval Accessories: Sealing pins for ARGUS smoke detector, Art. No. 547000. Flush-mounted system relay for ARGUS smoke detector, art. no. 548001. — Note: Not compatible with Merten CONNECT radio system. The wired connection of the ARGUS smoke detector Connect art. no. 5480.. is not permitted. With pipe cabling systems a gasket must be installed on site between the ceiling and the smoke detector. Contents: Battery.Screws and plugs.Surface-mounted mounting base with a larger wiring compartment. ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

548519 548560

1/10 8.3 1/10 8.3

Smoke detector

Accessories: Sealing pins for ARGUS smoke detector, Art. No. 547000. Flush-mounted system relay for ARGUS smoke detector, art. no. 548001. — Note: The wired connection of the ARGUS smoke detector Connect art. no. 5480.. is not permitted. With pipe cabling systems a gasket must be installed on site between the ceiling and the smoke detector. Contents: Battery.Screws and plugs.Surface-mounted mounting base with a larger wiring compartment. ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white aluminium

547519 547560

1/10 8.3 1/10 8.3

J

Info

Info

www.merten.com

Version polar white aluminium

Functional principle: scattered light (Tyndall effect) Sensitivity: in accordance with EN 14604 Supply voltage: AC 230 V, 50 Hz Battery type: 9 V monobloc battery, IEC 6LR61, alkali Battery failure signal: approx. every 40 seconds, for at least 30 days Battery life: With a 230 V power supply: approx. 4 - 5 years, depending on the self discharge of the battery used When battery-operated only: approx. 2.5 years Signal: approx. 85 dB(A) at 3 m distance Display elements: 2 LEDs (red, green) Network: max. 25 smoke detectors Network cable: separate, free core e.g. 1 x 1.5 mm2 in 230 V network Connecting terminals: each 2 x 2.5 mm2, looping possible Total cable length: up to 500 m Cable length between two detectors: max. 25 m Operating ambient temperature: 0 °C to 60 °C Dimensions: 112 x 44 mm (Ø x H); with surfacemounting base 112 x 59 mm (Ø x H) Type of protection: IP 42 With VdS approval

©2010

| ARGUS smoke detector | ARGUS SMOKE DETECTORS

417


ARGUS SMOKE DETECTORS ARGUS smoke detector Basic

Accessories

Battery-powered smoke detector for early detection of smouldering fires and open fires with development of smoke indoors. Functions: • Self-test • Continuous battery monitoring. A weak battery is displayed via an acoustic signal as well as a flashing LED. • Push-button for functional test

Flush-mounted system relay for ARGUS smoke detector The relay is connected to ARGUS smoke detectors and thus acts to forward a smoke alarm to external alarm devices. Depending on the smoke detector, this must be connected either via a separate core in the 230V mains network or per radio. The relay is powered with mains voltage and has a floating make contact for the external alarm device. You can connect for example the following alarm devices: horns, warning lights, vibration cushions for the deaf, or KNX binary inputs. These devices must have their own power supply. Suitable for installation in a size 60 installation box. Supply voltage: AC 230 V Contact type: Make contact, floating (SELV) Switching current: AC 230 V, µ 4 A / DC 24 V, µ 2 A Connecting terminals: for 2.5 mm2 Dimensions: 44 x 50 x 34 mm (WxHxD)

Functional principle: scattered light (Tyndall effect) Sensitivity: in accordance with EN 14604 Battery type: 9 V monobloc battery, IEC 6LR61, alkali Battery failure signal: approx. every 40 seconds, for at least 30 days Battery life: approx. 3 years Signal: approx. 85 dB(A) at 3 m distance Display elements: red LED Operating ambient temperature: 0 °C to 60 °C Dimensions: 112 x 44 mm (Ø x H) Type of protection: IP 42 With VdS approval Accessories: Sealing pins for ARGUS smoke detector, Art. No. 547000. – Technical Information — Contents: Battery.Screws and plugs. ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

polar white

547019

1/23 8.3

Info

˜

To be completed with: ARGUS Connect smoke detector art. no. 5480... ARGUS Connect smoke detector 230 V, art. no. 5485.. ARGUS smoke detector 230 V, art. no. 5475..

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

black

548001

1/60 8.3

Sealing pin for ARGUS smoke detector

ARGUS smoke detector Basic Longlife Battery-powered smoke detector for early detection of smouldering fires and open fires with smoke emission indoors. With lithium battery for extended service life. Functions: • Self-test • Continuous battery monitoring. A weak battery is displayed via an acoustic signal as well as a flashing LED. • Push-button for functional test

Smoke detector

J

Functional principle: scattered light (Tyndall effect) Sensitivity: in accordance with EN 14604 Battery type: 9 V monobloc battery, lithium Battery failure signal: approx. every 40 seconds, for at least 30 days Battery life: approx. 10 years Signal: approx. 85 dB(A) at 3 m distance Display elements: red LED Operating ambient temperature: 0 °C to 60 °C Dimensions: 112 x 44 mm (Ø x H) Type of protection: IP 42 With VdS approval Accessories: Sealing pins for ARGUS smoke detector, Art. No. 547000. – Technical Information — Contents: Battery.Screws and plugs. ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

547119

1/23 8.3

www.merten.com

Version polar white

418

ARGUS SMOKE DETECTORS | Accessories | ©2010

Info

Info

For direct display of smoke detector manipulation. When the smoke detector is removed, a sealing pin inserted into the mounting base breaks. Accessories from: ARGUS Connect smoke detector art. no. 5480... ARGUS Connect smoke detector 230 V art. no. 5485.. ARGUS smoke detector 230 V art. no. 5475.. ARGUS Basic smoke detector 230 V art. no. 547019. ARGUS Basic Longlife smoke detector 230 V art. no. 547119. — Contents: 1 PU = 50 sealing pins ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

black

547000

1/50 8.3

Info


ARGUS SMOKE DETECTORS

Smoke detector

www.merten.com

J

©2010

| Accessories | ARGUS SMOKE DETECTORS

419


Network technology

FLEXIBLE NETWORKING

Netzwerktechnik

Network technology

www.merten.de

Internet access in every room â&#x20AC;&#x201C; the wide variety of components of Merten's network technology make it possible. With only minor installation effort, any existing telephone socket can be replaces with a Line 21 socket. The Line 21 connection socket allows the existing four-wire connection to be used for the telephone as well as to surf the internet or establish a PC network. The only prerequisites are a four-wire connection between the rooms and a telephone socket. The necessary equipment includes a Line 21 connection socket RJ45 8/8, which must be located near the existing telephone socket, and a Line 21 combination socket to replace the existing telephone socket at the PC.

420

Network technology | Š2010

Existing cable (max. 50 m) Line21 combination socket-outlet

Line21 RJ45 8/8

1st telephone socket Splitter

modem

four-core


Contents

Line 21 Patch panel REG, 6-gang

Netzwerktechnik

www.merten.de

Switch REG, 5-gang

Š2010

| Network technology

421


NETWORK TECHNOLOGY Line 21 Patch panel REG, 6-gang

Network technologyNetwork technologySystem electronicsNetwork technologyNetwork technologyE

Technical Information: Network technology

With integrated Line 21 technology. Distribution board for simple changing of jumper cables without altering the wiring. With six lockable RJ45 ports, LSA+ terminal blocks. For installation on DIN rails EN 50022. For connecting analogue telephones/telecommunications systems and digital network devices (RJ45, 8-pole) such as PC, HUB, router, Merten switch (art. no. 465711) or IC 1 (art. no. 6950.., 6951...) With 2 LSA+ terminal blocks for the installation line and analogue telephony.

Line 21 Simultaneous transmission of analogue telephone signals and Ethernet using a single existing telephone line Technology: • It is not necessary to install an additional line. The existing telephone sockets are simply replaced with Line 21 sockets. This means that the existing telephone line (4-core) becomes an extended network for two services, analogue telephony and PC networking. Possible applications include analogue telephony plus: • Networking all PCs in the house or • Extension of a DSL link or • Connecting a digital video recorder in the network or • Connecting surveillance cameras with networking capability or • Using printers in a shared network –

Technical Information: Line 21

Cable length: max. 50 m Transmission rate: max. 100 Mbit/s (per installed line) Type of protection: IP 20 Device width: 6 modules = 108 mm ˜ –

Accessories: Patch cable RJ45/RJ45, art. no. 465710. Technical Information

Version

Art. no.

light grey

465714

Line 21 Combination socket-outlet RJ45/TAE With integrated Line 21 technology. For connecting an analogue telephone/telecommunications system (TAE) and a digital network device (RJ45, 8-pole) such as PC, HUB, router, Merten switch (art. no. 465711) or IC 1 (art. no. 6950.., 6951...) With 4 screw terminals for the installation line and 2 for the connection of additional telephone socket-outlets.

PU PG

Info

1/16 1

Line 21 Patch cable RJ45/TAE Cable for connecting Line 21 RJ45 insert (art. no. 465708) and analogue telephones/telecommunications systems. Length: 35 cm Version

Art. no.

grey/black

465713

PU PG

Info

1/150 1

Cable length: max. 50 m Transmission rate: max. 100 Mbit/s To be completed with: Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. System M 2960.., 2979.., System Basis 2928.., System Design 2978.., OCTOCOLOR 2938... – Technical Information

Network components

˜

Network technology

Version

Art. no.

8(6)-6F+N

465709

E

PU PG

Patch panel REG, 6-gang Distribution board for simple changing of jumper cables without altering the wiring. With six lockable RJ45 ports, LSA+ terminal blocks. For installation on DIN rails EN 50022.

Info

1/60 1

Category: CAT 5e Type of protection: IP 20 Device width: 6 modules = 108 mm

Line 21 RJ45 insert 8/8 With integrated Line 21 technology. For connecting an analogue telephone/telecommunications system (RJ45, 8-pole) and a digital network device (RJ45, 8-pole) such as PC, HUB, router, Merten switch (art. no. 465711) or IC 1 (art. no. 6950.., 6951...) With 4 screw terminals for the installation line and 2 for analogue telephony.

˜

Accessories: Patch cable RJ45/RJ45, art. no. 465710.

Version

Art. no.

light grey

465712

For targeted distribution of data to individual subscribers. The switch supports a data transfer rate of up to 100 Mbps. With five lockable RJ45 ports and integrated power supply unit. For installation on DIN rails EN 50022.

To be completed with: Central plate for RJ45 insert, 2-gang, art. no. System M 2961.., 2980.., System Basis 2927.., System Design 2926.., or OCTOCOLOR 2920... – Technical Information ˜

Art. no. 465708

PU PG

Supply voltage: AC 230 V Category: CAT 5e Display elements: LEDs per port for operating display and service function Type of protection: IP 20 Device width: 6 modules = 108 mm

Info

1/60 1

www.merten.com

˜

422

NETWORK TECHNOLOGY | Line 21 | ©2010

Info

Switch REG, 5-gang

Cable length: max. 50 m Transmission rate: max. 100 Mbit/s

Version

PU PG 1/16 1

Accessories: Patch cable RJ45/RJ45, art. no. 465710.

Version

Art. no.

light grey

465711

PU PG 1/15 1

Info


NETWORK TECHNOLOGY Patch cable RJ45/RJ45

Central plate for RJ45 insert, 1-gang

Cable for establishing a connection between the patch panel and the switch.

With labelling field. For System Design. For RJ45 inserts 8 (Cat 5e), RJ45 inserts by Rutenbeck or E-DAT designs by BTR.

Length: 35 cm Version

Art. no.

grey

465710

PU PG

Info

10/150 1

˜

To be completed with: RJ45 insert 8, art. no. 465720. RJ45 insert 8 Cat 5e, art. no. 465721. Accessories: Labelling strips for switches, socket-outlets, art. no. 395019

Version

Communications inserts and accessories

˜

RJ45 insert 8

˜

To be completed with: Central plate for RJ45 insert, 1-gang, art. no. System M 2962.., 2983.., System Basis 2917.., System Design 2918...

Version

Art. no. 465720

PU PG

465721

Info

To be completed with: Central plate for RJ45 insert, 2-gang, art. no. System M 2961.., 2980.., System Basis 2927.., System Design 2926.., or OCTOCOLOR 2920... – Technical Information ˜

PU PG 1/50 1

PU PG

296244 296219 296225

Info

To be completed with: Central plate for RJ45 insert, 2-gang, art. no. System M 2961.., 2980.., System Basis 2927.., System Design 2926.., or OCTOCOLOR 2920... – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

white

465702

Info

PU PG

Network technology

E

Info

10/40 1

RJ45 insert 8/8 Cat 5e

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy

For connecting analogue or digital terminal units via two 8-pole RJ45 connectors. Connection via LSA terminals.

10/120 1 10/120 1 10/120 1

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium

298344 298319 298314 298360

10/120 10/120 10/120 10/120

1 1 1.1 1.1

˜

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

To be completed with: Central plate for RJ45 insert, 2-gang, art. no. System M 2961.., 2980.., System Basis 2927.., System Design 2926.., or OCTOCOLOR 2920...

Version

Art. no.

white

465703

PU PG

Info

1/50 1

www.merten.com

˜

Art. no.

PU PG 10/40 1

For connecting analogue or digital terminal units via two 8-pole RJ45 connectors connected in parallel with bus-type cabling. With screw terminals.

To be completed with: RJ45 insert 8, art. no. 465720. RJ45 insert 8 Cat 5e, art. no. 465721.

Version

˜

Art. no. 465701

Info

For System M. For RJ45 inserts 8 (Cat 5e), RJ45 inserts by Rutenbeck or E-DAT designs by BTR.

˜

Version white

RJ45 insert 2x8

Central plate for RJ45 insert, 1-gang

˜

10/120 1.1

10/50 1

To be completed with: Central plate for RJ45 insert, 1-gang, art. no. System M 2962.., 2983.., System Basis 2917.., System Design 2918... Art. no.

291846

For connecting analogue or digital terminal units via two 8-pole RJ45 connectors. With screw terminals.

For connecting analogue or digital terminals using an 8-pole RJ45 socket. Connection via LSA terminals.

Version

10/120 1 10/120 1 10/120 1.1

RJ45 insert 8/8

RJ45 insert 8 Cat 5e

˜

291844 291819 291860

Info

metallic

stainless steel

˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white aluminium

For connecting analogue or digital terminals using an 8-pole RJ45 socket. With screw terminals.

Art. no.

©2010

| Communications inserts and accessories | NETWORK TECHNOLOGY

423


NETWORK TECHNOLOGY RJ45 insert 8/8 Cat 6

Central plate for RJ45 insert, 2-gang

For connecting analogue or digital terminal units via two 8-pole RJ45 connectors. Connection via LSA terminals.

˜

To be completed with: Central plate for RJ45 insert, 2-gang, art. no. System M 2961.., 2980.., System Basis 2927.., System Design 2926.., or OCTOCOLOR 2920...

Version

Art. no.

white

465706

PU PG

Info

1/50 1

For System M. For RJ45 inserts 8/8, 2x8, Line 21 RJ45 insert 8/ 8, RJ45 inserts by Rutenbeck or E-DAT designs by BTR.

Art. no.

296144 296119 296125

PU PG

10/120 1 10/120 1 10/120 1

298044 298019 298014 298060

10/120 10/120 10/120 10/120

˜

˜

1 1 1.1 1.1

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium ˜

Art. no.

292644 292619 292629 292615 292669 292660

10/120 10/120 10/120 10/120 10/120 10/120

1 1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2

292643 292646

10/120 1.4 10/120 1.2

metallic

www.merten.com

antique brass stainless steel

424

10/120 1 10/120 1

292042

10/120 1.2

292005

10/120 1.2

Combination socket-outlet RJ45/ TAE (Cat 3) For connecting a telephone and an analogue or digital terminal unit via the 8-pole RJ45 connector. With screw terminals. To be completed with: Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. System M 2960.., 2979.., System Basis 2928.., System Design 2978.., OCTOCOLOR 2938... – Technical Information

To be completed with: RJ45 insert 8/8, art. no. 465701. RJ45 insert 2x8, art. no. 465702. RJ45 insert 8/8 Cat 5e, art. no. 465703. RJ45 insert 8/8 Cat 6, art. no. 465706. Accessories: Labelling strips for switches, socket-outlets, art. no. 395019

Version

292044 292019

˜

With labelling field. For System Design. For RJ45 inserts 8/8, 2x8, Line 21 RJ45 insert 8/ 8, RJ45 inserts by Rutenbeck or E-DAT designs by BTR. ˜

Info

metallic

varnished bronze metallic varnished titanium

Version

Art. no.

8(6)-6F+N, white

465707

NETWORK TECHNOLOGY | Communications inserts and accessories | ©2010

PU PG

Info

1/60 1

Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE For System M. For telephone socket-outlets TAE or TDO, combination socket-outlets RJ45/TAE or flush-mounted USB interface.

Central plate for RJ45 insert, 2-gang

E

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

Network technology

Art. no.

white polar white

Info

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

Version

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

To be completed with: RJ45 insert 8/8, art. no. 465701. RJ45 insert 2x8, art. no. 465702. RJ45 insert 8/8 Cat 5e, art. no. 465703. RJ45 insert 8/8 Cat 6, art. no. 465706.

To be completed with: RJ45 insert 8/8, art. no. 465701. RJ45 insert 2x8, art. no. 465702. RJ45 insert 8/8 Cat 5e, art. no. 465703. RJ45 insert 8/8 Cat 6, art. no. 465706.

Version ˜

˜

˜

Central plate for RJ45 insert, 2-gang

˜

For OCTOCOLOR. For RJ45 inserts 8/8, 2x8, Line 21 RJ45 insert 8/ 8, RJ45 inserts by Rutenbeck or E-DAT designs by BTR.

˜

To be completed with: Telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. 4652... Loudspeaker connection insert art. no. 4669.., 4670... USB interface, flush-mounted, art. no. 681799. Telephone socketoutlet TDO, art. no. 465930.

Version ˜

Info

296044 296019 296025

5/150 1 5/150 1 5/150 1

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

297944 297919 297914 297960

5/150 5/150 5/150 5/150

1 1 1.1 1.1

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant


NETWORK TECHNOLOGY Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE

Communications inserts

Inclined outlet

For System Design. For telephone socket-outlets TAE or TDO, combination socket-outlets RJ45/TAE or flush-mounted USB interface. To be completed with: Telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. 4652... Loudspeaker connection insert art. no. 4669.., 4670... USB interface, flush-mounted, art. no. 681799. Telephone socketoutlet TDO, art. no. 465930. Accessories: Labelling strips for switches, socket-outlets, art. no. 395019

Version ˜

Art. no.

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white light grey dark brazil black grey aluminium ˜

PU PG

297844 297819 297829 297815 297869 297860

1/150 1/150 1/150 1/150 1/150 1/150

1 1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2

297843 297846

1/150 1.4 1/150 1.2

Version ˜

˜

Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE

˜

˜

PU PG

293844 293819

1/150 1 1/150 1

293842 293805

1/150 1.2 1/150 1.2

metallic

bronze metallic titanium

464944 464919 464925

1/50 1 1/50 1 1/50 1

464644 464619 464614 464660

1/50 1/50 1/50 1/50

1 1 1.1 1.1

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

Inclined outlet For data connection and communications technology. Order the associated inserts separately. With labelling field. To be labelled with labelling strips.

Info

To be completed with: Communications inserts, art. no. System M and System Design 464379-99. Accessories: Labelling strips for switches, socket-outlets, art. no. 395019 – Technical Information — Contents: Without inserts. ˜

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white ˜

Art. no.

Info

Thermoplastic classy matt

To be completed with: Telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. 4652... Loudspeaker connection insert art. no. 4669.., 4670... USB interface, flush-mounted, art. no. 681799. Telephone socketoutlet TDO, art. no. 465930.

Version

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white anthracite aluminium

For telephone socket-outlets TAE or TDO, combination socket-outlets RJ45/TAE or flush-mounted USB interface. ˜

Art. no.

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy

metallic

antique brass stainless steel

To be completed with: Communications inserts, art. no. System M and System Design 464379-99. – Technical Information — Note: The inclined outlet does not look attractive when installed on the 1-M or ATELIER-M frame. We recommend using the MSMART or M-PLAN frame for this. Contents: Without inserts. ˜

Version ˜

Art. no.

Network technology

Info

E

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white light grey dark brazil black grey ˜

PU PG

464344 464319 464329 464315 464369

1/50 1/50 1/50 1/50 1/50

1 1 1.2 1.2 1.2

464360 464346

1/50 1.2 1/50 1.2

metallic

aluminium stainless steel

Insert for modular jack connector Cat 5 For modular jack Cat 5, RJ 45 connector or AMP connector. Second opening can be broken out. ˜

To be completed with: Inclined outlet, art. no. System M 4649.., 4646.., System Design 4643... Accessories: Modular jack connector Cat 5, art. no. 465595.

Version

Art. no.

black

464399

PU PG

Info

10/300 1 www.merten.com

˜

For data connection and communications technology. Order the associated inserts separately.

©2010

| Communications inserts | NETWORK TECHNOLOGY

425


NETWORK TECHNOLOGY Insert for modular jack connector

Insert for modular jack connector Cat 5

For two modular jack connectors Cat 3 For AMP or Thomas & Betts connectors. Second opening can be broken out. ˜

To be completed with: Inclined outlet, art. no. System M 4649.., 4646.., System Design 4643... Accessories: Modular jack connector Cat 3, art. no. 465516/18.

Version

Art. no.

black

464398

PU PG

Info

For modular jack Cat 5, RJ 45 connector or AMP connector. ˜

To be completed with: Inclined outlet, art. no. OCTOCOLOR 463344/19/42/05. Accessories: Modular jack connector Cat 5, art. no. 465595.

Version

10/300 1 ˜

Art. no.

Insert for Thomas & Betts data communication connectors

Version

Art. no.

black

464394

PU PG

463399

For two modular jack connectors Cat 3 For AMP or Thomas & Betts connectors. Second opening can be broken out. ˜

Info

10/300 1

To be completed with: Inclined outlet, art. no. OCTOCOLOR 463344/19/42/05. Accessories: Modular jack connector Cat 3, art. no. 465516/18.

Version

Insert for Reichle & De-Massari For two Reichle & De Massari connection modules or additional R&M modules. Information: http://www.rdm.com ˜

˜

black

464384

PU PG

Network technology

E

Version

Art. no.

6-pole RJ 11/ Cat. 3, black 8-pole RJ 45/ Cat. 3, black

465516

5/250 1

465518

5/250 1

To be completed with: Communications inserts, art. no. OCTOCOLOR 463386-99. – Technical Information — Contents: Without inserts.

˜

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white ˜

Art. no.

463344 463319

1/50 1 1/50 1

463342

1/50 1.2

463305

1/50 1.2

metallic

www.merten.com

varnished bronze metallic varnished titanium

426

NETWORK TECHNOLOGY | Communications inserts | ©2010

10/300 1

To be completed with: Supporting plate for modular jack connector, art. no. 461590. Insert for modular jack connector, art. no. System M 464398, System Basis 461398, System Design 464398, OCTOCOLOR 463398. Central plate for modular jack connector, art. no. System M 2901.., 2957.., System Basis 2929... PU PG

Info

Modular jack connector, Cat 5

˜

Version

463398

Pin configuration Telecom/ISDN modular jack/8pole: 1a/4, 1b/5, 2a/3, 2b/6.

10/300 1

For data connection and communications technology. Order the associated inserts separately. With labelling field.

Info

WE Western type. In line with US FCC 86, Cat 3. Connection with IDC clamping method.

Info

Inclined outlet

PU PG

Modular jack connector, Cat 3

˜

Art. no.

Art. no.

Thermoplastic brilliant

black

To be completed with: Inclined outlet, art. no. System M 4649.., 4646.., System Design 4643... Accessories: Reichle & De-Massari connection module, unshielded, art. no. 465580/82. Reichle & De-Massari connection module, shielded, art. no. 465581/83. Reichle & De-Massari splash flange, art. no. 465591. Reichle & De-Massari splash sleeve, art. no. 465590.

Version

10/300 1

Insert for modular jack connector

For data connectors from Thomas & Betts and IBM inserts IBM ACS type G. To be completed with: Inclined outlet, art. no. System M 4649.., 4646.., System Design 4643...

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

black

˜

PU PG

WE Western type. In line with US FCC 86, Cat 5. Connection via LSA terminals. ˜

To be completed with: Supporting plate for modular jack connector, art. no. 461593. Insert for modular jack connector, art. no. System M 464399, System Basis 461399, System Design 464399, OCTOCOLOR 463399.

Version

Art. no.

8-pole RJ 45/ Cat. 5, black

465595

PU PG 5/120 1

Info


NETWORK TECHNOLOGY

˜

Reichle & De-Massari connection module, unshielded

Central plate for RJ 11/RJ 45 insert, 2-gang

Connection with ICD clamping method (no equipment necessary).

For System M. For Lexcom modules.

To be completed with: Insert for Reichle & De-Massari, art. no. 464384. Accessories: Reichle & De-Massari splash flange, art. no. 465591. Reichle & De-Massari splash sleeve, art. no. 465590.

Version

Art. no.

Cat 5e, 1xRJ45/u Cat 6, 1xRJ45/u

465580 465582

PU PG

Info

2/100 1 2/100 1

˜

Connection with ICD clamping method (no equipment necessary).

Art. no.

Version

Art. no. 465581 465583

PU PG

MEG4542-0344 MEG4542-0319 MEG4542-0325

MEG4542-0444 MEG4542-0419 MEG4542-0414 MEG4542-0460

5/150 1 5/150 1 5/150 1

new new new

5/150 5/150 5/150 5/150

new new new new

1 1 1.1 1.1

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

To be completed with: Insert for Reichle & De-Massari, art. no. 464384. Accessories: Reichle & De-Massari splash flange, art. no. 465591. Reichle & De-Massari splash sleeve, art. no. 465590.

Cat 5e, 1xRJ45/s Cat 6, 1xRJ45/s

Info

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Reichle & De-Massari connection module, shielded

˜

Version

Central plate for modular jack connector For two modular jack connectors Cat 3. For AMP or Thomas & Betts connectors. Without claws, for screw fixing.

Info

2/100 1 2/100 1

To be completed with: Modular jack connector Cat 3, art. no. 465516/18. – Technical Information — Contents: With sealing plug for one opening. ˜

Central plate for RJ 11/RJ 45 insert, 1-gang

Version

For System M. For Lexcom modules.

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy

Version ˜

Info

MEG4541-0344 MEG4541-0319 MEG4541-0325

5/150 1 5/150 1 5/150 1

new new new

5/150 5/150 5/150 5/150

new new new new

˜

˜

MEG4541-0444 MEG4541-0419 MEG4541-0414 MEG4541-0460

1 1 1.1 1.1

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant 290144 290119 290125

5/150 1 5/150 1 5/150 1

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

˜

Art. no.

295744 295719 295714 295760

5/150 5/150 5/150 5/150

1 1 1.1 1.1

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

Network technology

E

Central plate for modular jack connector with shut-off slide

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

Suitable for the supporting plates for modular jack connectors. With two openings and shut-off slide. To be completed with: Supporting plate for modular jack connector, art. no. 4615... – Technical Information ˜

Version ˜

Art. no.

461944 461919 461925

5/200 1 5/200 1 5/200 1

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

PU PG

461744 461719 461714 461760

5/200 5/200 5/200 5/200

1 1 1.1 1.1

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

©2010

| Communications technology | NETWORK TECHNOLOGY

www.merten.com

Communications technology

427


NETWORK TECHNOLOGY Supporting plates for modular jack connector Suitable for communication connectors. Supporting plate (art. no. 461590) for Cat 3 modular jack connector and supporting plate (art. no. 461593) for Cat 5 modular jack connector. To be completed with: Central plate for modular jack connector with shut-off slide, art. no. System M 4619.., 4617.., System Basis 4615... Accessories: Modular jack connector Cat 3, art. no. 465516/18. Modular jack connector Cat 5, art. no. 465595. – Technical Information ˜

Version

Art. no.

red transparent black yellow green

461590 461591 461592 461593 461594

PU PG 4/240 4/240 4/240 4/240 4/240

Info

1 1 1 1 1

Network technology

www.merten.com

E

428

NETWORK TECHNOLOGY | Communications technology | ©2010


NETWORK TECHNOLOGY

Network technology

www.merten.com

E

Š2010

| Communications technology | NETWORK TECHNOLOGY

429


KNX system devices

INTELLIGENCE THROUGHOUT THE HOME

KNX system devices

KNX system characteristics

System devices and components

Equipped for the future with KNX: the data is recorded by sensors and sent via a twin-core bus device to the actuators to control their activity.

are needed to operate the system. They consist of power supply units for generating bus voltage, couplers for connecting bus segments and interfaces for connecting programming devices. Sensors generally only need the bus line but actuators usually need the 230V mains supply as well to control the loads. Bus line and mains supply are separated from each other.

Sensors record information. This information can include room temperature, movements, or manually entered instructions, which are transmitted as data across the KNX bus system.

www.merten.de

The actuators receive data that is then converted into actions, such as lowering or raising a blind, or dimming a light.

430

KNX system devices | Š2010


KNX system devices

Contents

Now choosing and ordering KNX articles is even easier. You will quickly find the required components in the System devices, Sensors and Actuators sections.

REG-K emergency power supply

KNX power supply: the solution for all your requirements KNX power supply

KNX system devices starting on page 430 • Power supply units • Bus coupler • IP routers • Interfaces/gateways • Accessories

KNX sensors starting on page 442 • Push-button • Room temperature control unit • Binary inputs • Movement and presence detectors • Time switches • Devices for display and operation

KNX actuators starting on page 482 available in these versions: • 160 mA • 320 mA • 640 mA for one line each of bus devices

• Switch actuators • Blind actuators • Dimming actuators • Room temperature control unit • Devices for display and operation

KNX system devices

KNX power supply unit with emergency input

www.merten.de

available in these versions: • 160 mA • 320 mA • 640 mA for one line each of bus devices

©2010

| KNX system devices

431


KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES KNX power supply REG-K/320 mA

KNX system devicesKNX system devices/accessoriesKNX systemKNX system devices/accessoriesK

The current product database can be obtained by calling the following telephone number or from the Internet at http:// www.merten.com • E-mail: info@merten.de • Tel.: 02261 702-286 • Fax: 02261 702- 633 • Technical information / Infoline • E-mail: infoline@merten.de • Tel.: 0800 63783640 • Fax: 0800 63783630 –

For generating the bus voltage for a line with up to 64 bus devices. With integrated choke to decouple the power supply from the bus and a push-button to disconnect the power and reset the bus devices connected to the line. For installation on DIN rails EN 60715. The bus is connected using a bus connecting terminal; a data rail is not necessary. Mains voltage: AC 110 - 230 V, 50-60 Hz Output voltage: DC 30 V Output current: max. 320 mA, short-circuit-proof Device width: 4 TE = approx. 72 mm

Technical Information: KNX system characteristics

Bus voltage supply • The devices have protection type IP 20 and can only be used indoors. Devices with a different type of protection are labelled separately.

Contents: With bus connecting terminal and cable cover.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

light grey

684032

1/10 9.3

KNX power supply REG-K/320 mA with emergency power input For generating the bus voltage for a line with up to 64 bus devices. The emergency power supply REG can be connected in order to buffer the bus voltage. With integrated choke to decouple the power supply from the bus and a push-button to disconnect the power and reset the bus devices connected to the line. For installation on DIN rails EN 60715. The bus is connected using a bus connecting terminal; a data rail is not necessary. Mains voltage: AC 110 - 230 V, 50-60 Hz Output voltage: DC 30 V Output current: max. 320 mA, short-circuit-proof Device width: 4 TE = approx. 72 mm

KNX power supply REG-K/160 mA For generating the bus voltage for a line with up to 32 bus devices. With integrated choke to decouple the power supply from the bus and a push-button to disconnect the power and reset the bus devices connected to the line. For installation on DIN rails EN 60715. The bus is connected using a bus connecting terminal; a data rail is not necessary. Mains voltage: AC 110 - 230 V, 50-60 Hz Output voltage: DC 30 V Output current: max. 160 mA, short-circuit-proof Device width: 4 TE = approx. 72 mm —

Contents: With bus connecting terminal and cable cover.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

light grey

684016

1/10 9.3

Info

˜ —

Accessories: REG emergency power supply, art. no. 683901. Contents: With bus connecting terminal and cable cover.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

light grey

683832

1/10 9.3

KNX power supply REG-K/160 mA with emergency power input For generating the bus voltage for a line with up to 32 bus devices. The emergency power supply REG can be connected in order to buffer the bus voltage. With integrated choke to decouple the power supply from the bus and a push-button to disconnect the power and reset the bus devices connected to the line. For installation on DIN rails EN 60715. The bus is connected using a bus connecting terminal; a data rail is not necessary. Mains voltage: AC 110 - 230 V, 50-60 Hz Output voltage: DC 30 V Output current: max. 160 mA, short-circuit-proof Device width: 4 TE = approx. 72 mm

KNX system devices

K

Accessories: REG emergency power supply, art. no. 683901. — Contents: With bus connecting terminal and cable cover. ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

683816

1/10 9.3

Info

www.merten.com

Version light grey

432

KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES | Bus voltage supply | ©2010

Info

Info

KNX power supply REG-K/640 mA For generating the bus voltage for a line with up to 64 bus devices. With integrated choke to decouple the power supply from the bus and a push-button to disconnect the power and reset the bus devices connected to the line. For installation on DIN rails EN 60715. The bus is connected using a bus connecting terminal; a data rail is not necessary. Mains voltage: AC 110 - 230 V, 50-60 Hz Output voltage: DC 30 V Output current: max. 640 mA, short-circuit-proof Device width: 4 TE = approx. 72 mm —

Contents: With bus connecting terminal and cable cover.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

light grey

684064

1/10 9.3

Info


KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES KNX power supply REG-K/640 mA with emergency power input For generating the bus voltage for a line with up to 64 bus devices. The emergency power supply REG can be connected in order to buffer the bus voltage. With integrated choke to decouple the power supply from the bus and a push-button to disconnect the power and reset the bus devices connected to the line. For installation on DIN rails EN 60715. The bus is connected using a bus connecting terminal; a data rail is not necessary. Mains voltage: AC 110 - 230 V, 50-60 Hz Output voltage: DC 30 V Output current: max. 640 mA, short-circuit-proof Device width: 4 modules = approx. 72 mm

Lead gel battery Lead gel battery to connect to the emergency input of the power supply 320 REG-K with battery connection. Also for powering the outdoor siren with flashlight, TeleConnect or IC 1 Internet controller. Nominal voltage: DC 12 V Capacity: 7.2 Ah ˜

In KNX, to be completed with: REG emergency power supply, art. no. 683901.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

7.2 Ah

668990

1/2 8.2

Lead gel battery Lead gel battery for connecting to the emergency power supply REG.

Accessories: REG emergency power supply, art. no. 683901. — Contents: With bus connecting terminal and cable cover. ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

light grey

683890

1/10 9.3

Nominal voltage: DC 12 V Capacity: 18 Ah

Info ˜

REG emergency power supply To buffer the bus voltage. If a complete mains failure occurs, an external lead gel battery with a voltage of DC 12 V (SELV) can be connected to the REG power supply for buffering. The lead gel battery is recharged or maintained in its charged state by integrated charging electronics. A binary input can be connected in order to register the operational statuses (mains voltage, error warning, battery operation). For installation on DIN rails EN 60715. A data rail is not necessary. Mains voltage: AC 110 - 230 V, 50-60 Hz Output to power supply: Output voltage: DC 30 V ±2 V Output current: without battery with mains supply max. 300 mA, with battery without mains supply max. 640 mA Short-circuit current: < 1.5 A Charging current: max. 1 A Connections: plug-in screw terminal for main connector, operating state (4-pin, 3 floating contacts) and emergency power supply. Plug-in terminal for battery connection (two 1 mm pins) Device width: 4 modules = approx. 72 mm In KNX, to be completed with: KNX power supply REG-K/160 mA with emergency power input, art. no. 683816. KNX power supply REG-K/320 mA with emergency power input, art. no. 683832. KNX power supply REG-K/640 mA with emergency power input, art. no. 683890. Accessories: Lead gel battery, art. no. 668990. Lead gel battery, art. no. 668991. Binary input REG-K/4x24, art. no. 644892. Power supply REG, DC 24 V/0.4 A, art. no. 693003. — Contents: With connecting terminal and cable cover

Info

In KNX, to be completed with: REG emergency power supply, art. no. 683901.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

668991

1/1 8.2

Info

System components • The devices have protection type IP 20 and can only be used indoors. Devices with a different type of protection are labelled separately.

Coupler REG-K For logical connection and electrical isolation of lines and areas. For mounting on DIN rails EN 50022. The bus is connected using a bus connecting terminal; a data rail is not necessary. Contact established with the primary and secondary line via bus connecting terminal. Device width: 2 modules = approx. 36 mm —

KNX system devices

Contents: With 2 bus connecting terminals.

K

˜

Art. no.

PU PG

683901

1/10 9.3

Art. no.

PU PG

680204

1/35 9.3

Info

Info

www.merten.com

Version light grey

Version light grey

©2010

| System components | KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES

433


KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES KNX/IP router REG-K The KNX/IP router enables telegrams to be forwarded between different lines via LAN (IP) as a rapid backbone. The device can additionally serve as a programming interface in order to connect a PC with the KNX bus (e.g. for ETS programming with suitable ETS). The IP address can be assigned dynamically via a DHCP server or via manual configuration (ETS parameter). The device operates in accordance with the KNXnet/IP specification using Core, device management, tunnelling and routing. The KNX/IP router forwards telegrams in both directions whilst taking a filter table into account and can buffer up to 150 telegrams. For installation on DIN rails EN 50022. The bus is connected using a bus connecting terminal; a data rail is not necessary. Supply voltage: DC 12-30 V (at DC 24 V 40 mA), AC 12-24 V Device width: 2 modules = approx. 36 mm

Power supply REG, 24 V DC / 1.25 A Power supply for 24 V binary inputs, REG-K panel control, KNX/IP router REG-K, 10" IP touch panel. For installation onto DIN rails EN 50022. With integrated overload and short-circuit protection. Primary supply: AC 100-240 V, 50-60 Hz Output voltage: DC 24 V +/- 3 % Output current: max. 1.25 A Output power: max. 30 W Device width: 4 modules = approx. 72 mm ˜

For supplying power to: Binary input REG-K/8x24 art. no. 644792. Panel control REG-K/12x24 art. no. 675001. Panel control REG-K/8-4x24 art. no. 675101. Universal I/O panel control REG-K/32x24 art. no. 675201. KNX/IP router REG-K art. no. 680329. IP touch panel 10" art. no. 683090.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

light grey

693004

1/15 9.3

In KNX, to be completed with: Power supply REG, DC 24 V/0.4 A, art. no. 693003. Power supply REG, DC 24 V/1.25 A, art. no. 693004. Power supply REG, AC 24 V / 1 A, art. no. 663529. Also alternatively Power over Ethernet (PoE). — Contents: With bus connecting terminal. ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

light grey

680329

1/70 9.3

Power supply REG, AC 24 V/1 A Power supply for 24 V binary inputs, weather station REG-K/4-gang, analogue input module REGK/4-gang, rain sensor, wind sensor with 0 - 10 V interface and heating, KNX/IP router REG-K. For installation onto DIN rails EN 50022. With fuse.

Info

Primary supply: AC 230 V, +/- 10 %, 50-60 Hz Output voltage: AC 24 V Output current: max. 1 A Fuse: 5x20 mm, 250 V, T 160 mA Device width: 5 modules = approx. 90 mm

System accessories • The devices have protection type IP 20 and can only be used indoors. Devices with a different type of protection are labelled separately.

Power supply REG, 24 V DC / 0.4 A Power supply for 24 V binary inputs, Internet Controller REG-K, REG-K panel control, KNX/IP router REG-K. For installation onto DIN rails EN 50022. With integrated overload and short-circuit protection.

KNX system devices

K

Primary supply: AC 230 V, 48-63 Hz Output voltage: DC 24 V +/- 3 % Output current: max. 0.4 A Output power: max. 10 W Device width: 1 module = approx. 18 mm ˜

For supplying power to: Binary input REG-K/8x24 art. no. 644792. Panel control REG-K/12x24 art. no. 675001. Panel control REG-K/8-4x24 art. no. 675101. Universal I/O panel control REG-K/32x24 art. no. 675201. KNX/IP router REG-K art. no. 680329. KNX Internet Controller IC1-V2 REG-K, merten@home, art. no. 6951...

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

light grey

693003

1/60 9.3

For supplying power to: Binary input REG-K/8x24 art. no. 644792. Weather station REG-K/4-gang, art. no. 682991. Analogue input module REG/4-gang art. no. 682192. Rain sensor for art. no. 663595. Wind sensor with 0-10V interface and heating, art. no. 663592. KNX/IP router REG-K art. no. 680329. Thermoelectric valve drive 24 V art. no. 639126. — Contents: With spare fuse. ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

light grey

663529

1/15 9.3

For connecting up to eight bus lines and power supplies to the data rail via bus connecting terminals. For mounting on DIN rails EN 50022-35 x 7.5, with integrated data rail. Device width: 1 module = approx. 18 mm ˜ —

In KNX, to be completed with: Data rail, art. no. 6899 .. Contents: With 2 bus connecting terminals.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

light grey

680602

2/140 9.3

www.merten.com

Info

Data rail For connecting KNX devices installed in series in distribution panels on DIN rail. For bonding (selfadhesive) into the DIN rail EN 50022-35 x 7.5.

Info

KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES | System accessories | ©2010

Info

Data rail connector REG/4

˜

434

Info

Accessories: Data rail cover, art. no. 689801.

Version

Art. no.

214 mm

689901

PU PG 5/500 9

Info


KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES Data rail cover

Blanking cover

For covering unused data rail connectors by snapping onto the DIN rail EN 50022 35x7.5.

For System M. Screw-on cover for flush-mounted bus coupler or flush-mounted actuators.

Length: 242 mm ˜

In KNX, to be completed with: Data rail, art. no. 6899 ..

Version

Art. no.

light grey

689801

PU PG 5/50 9

Bus connecting terminal For connecting max. 4 core pairs to an KNX device, can also be used as a branch terminal. Consists of two interlocked terminal parts in red ("+") and dark grey ("-"), each with 4 plug-in terminals. For solid conductors with a diameter of 0.6 to 0.8 mm. Version

Art. no.

red/dark grey

689701

˜

Info

PU PG

Info

50/ 9 2500

In KNX, to be completed with: Bus coupler, flush-mounted, art. no. 690099. Bus coupler, flush-mounted 2, art. no. 690299. Switch actuator, flush-mounted, art. no. 627099. Series actuator, flush-mounted, art. no. 627199. Blind actuator, flush-mounted, art. no. 627299.

Version ˜

Art. no.

˜

Version

Art. no. 689702

PU PG

light grey

662929

PU PG

1/100 1/100 1/100 1/100

9 9 9 9

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

For System Design. Screw-on cover for flush-mounted bus coupler or flush-mounted actuators.

Info

50/ 9 2500

˜

For covering the stripped bus cable in all REG-K devices. The cable cover guarantees a safe distance between the SELV bus voltage and the mains voltage. Art. no.

662144 662119 662114 662160

Blanking cover

Cable cover for REG-K

Version

1/100 9 1/100 9 1/100 9

Thermoplastic classy matt

Branch terminal comprising two interlocking terminal parts in yellow and white, each with 4 plugin terminals. For solid conductors with a diameter of 0.6 to 0.8 mm. For wiring the yellow/white cores of the bus cable. yellow/white

662344 662319 662325

white polar white anthracite aluminium

Branch terminal, yellow/white

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

PU PG

Info

5/500 9

Version ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white aluminium ˜

Protective cover for plaster

In KNX, to be completed with: Bus coupler, flush-mounted, art. no. 690099. Bus coupler, flush-mounted 2, art. no. 690299. Switch actuator, flush-mounted, art. no. 627099. Series actuator, flush-mounted, art. no. 627199. Blind actuator, flush-mounted, art. no. 627299.

662244 662219 662260

1/100 9 1/100 9 1/100 9

662246

1/100 9

metallic

varnished stainless steel

For protecting the bus coupler, flush-mounted actuators, Easy flush-mounted modules or actuators from damage during painting and decorating work.

K

In KNX, to be completed with: Bus coupler, flush-mounted, art. no. 690099. Bus coupler, flush-mounted 2, art. no. 690299. Switch actuator, flush-mounted, art. no. 627099. Series actuator, flush-mounted, art. no. 627199. Blind actuator, flush-mounted, art. no. 627299.

Version

Art. no.

black

690098

PU PG

Info

10/300 9

www.merten.com

˜

KNX system devices

©2010

| System accessories | KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES

435


KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES Mini-function module REG

Function module

Open and closed-loop control tasks are possible using KNX thanks to the mini-function module REG. The received bus telegrams are interpreted and processed according to the freely programmable logic or mathematical functions. The results are sent to the actuators as telegrams via the bus (no floating point format). The device is programmed using KNX (no integrated RS 232 interface). Projects may comprise 150 function blocks and 200 group addresses. Mini-function module projects can also be processed by the function module REG. A real-time operating system performs control and management of the functional elements, which are programmed in a graphical language. The integrated real-time clock permits precise time-based control sequences. A library of functional elements permits creation of programs appropriate to the needs of any application, e.g. for complex heating, lighting and blind control. The mini-function module tool software permits the selection of approx. 40 functional elements with diverse standardised KNX data telegrams from the function library, for combination in application programs. The programs are then loaded into the device and executed.

• The devices have protection type IP 20 and can only be used indoors. Devices with a different type of protection are labelled separately.

KNX Logic module Basic REG-K In KNX installations, the logic module serves as a logic and control device. It has 10 logic, 10 filter/ timer, 8 converter and 12 multiplexer modules. With 3 freely programmable push-buttons and 3 status LEDs. They can be assigned control and test functions and can be operated on the device. KNX software functions: 10 logic modules (AND, OR, XOR) • Each with up to 8 binary input objects and an output object. • Input and output object inversion. • Output disable via gate function. • Behaviour of each input object after bus reset. • Adjustable sending behaviour. 10 filter and timer modules • Binary input objects and an output object with time delays. • Binary input object filtering before output. • Output disable via gate function. • Behaviour of each input object after bus reset. • Adjustable sending behaviour. 8 converter modules • Conversion of 1 bit switching telegrams into 2 bit priority control. • Conversion of 1 bit switching telegrams into 8 bit value telegrams. • Conversion of 8 bit value telegrams into 1 bit switching telegrams. • Output disable via gate function. • Behaviour of each input object after bus reset. • Adjustable sending behaviour. 12 multiplexer modules (lighting control) Multiplexer modules are used to selectively control telegrams, e.g. to toggle between single room and total room control for conference rooms with partition walls. • Supported telegram formats by module: 1 bit, 2 bit, 4 bit, 8 bit , 2 byte. • A module can be used for the 4 byte format. • Telegram forwarding/blocking in one or both directions using the control object. • Adjustable gate behaviour. • Adjustable control object behaviour. • Output disable via gate function. • Adjustable sending behaviour. • Adjustable sending delay. Push-button and LED assignment • The three push-buttons and the three LEDs can be freely assigned with binary objects. • Behaviour per LED. • Behaviour per push-button. Behaviour after bus reset • Adjustable module start-up delay after bus voltage recovery.

KNX system devices

K

Device width: 2.5 module = approx. 45 mm Art. no.

PU PG

676090

1/30 9.3

Info

www.merten.com

Version light grey

436

KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES | Function module | ©2010

Power: A 29 V DC power supply is required via the two outer conductors of the data rail and a data rail connector REG/4. Power consumption: Normal operation approx. 40 mA Programming mode approx. 100 mA Device width: 3 modules = approx. 54 mm In KNX, to be completed with: Mini-function module tool software, art. no. 615011. Data rail, art. no. 6899.., data rail connector REG/4, art. no. 680602. — Note: The software, art. no. 615011, (Windows 98 or higher) for programming the mini-function module is available on the Internet or on the Merten info CD. The program FM Loader 32 is available over the Internet for operating systems Windows NT, 2000 and XP. ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

light grey

676099

1/30 9.3

Info


KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES Function module REG

Function module tool software

Extensive open and closed-loop control tasks are possible using KNX thanks to the function module REG. The sensors and actuators can be connected to the bus locally and cost-effectively. The received bus telegrams are interpreted and processed according to the freely programmable logic or mathematic functions. The results are sent to the actuators as telegrams via the bus. A real-time multi-tasking operating system performs control and management of the functional elements, which are freely programmed in a graphical language. The integrated real-time clock permits precise time-based control sequences. A library of functional elements permits creation of programs appropriate to the needs of any application, e.g. for complex heating, lighting and blind control. The function module tool software allows more than 50 functional elements, supporting a variety of standardised KNX data telegrams, to be selected from the function library and assembled into application programs. The programs are then loaded into the device and executed.

The function module tool software is used to configure the application programs of the function module REG. An easy-to-use graphic editor that runs under Windows makes it possible to program the function module on a conventional PC, which can also be used for the ETS program. The program created with the graphic editor is loaded into the function module via the computer's RS 232 interface after compilation (translation into the language of the function module). The function module and additional program FM Loader 32 can be programmed under Windows NT, 2000 and XP operating systems, and also via the bus.

Power: A 29 V DC power supply is required via the two outer conductors of the data rail and a data rail connector REG/4. Power consumption: Normal operation approx. 40 mA Programming mode approx. 100 mA Device width: 3 modules = approx. 54 mm In KNX, to be completed with: Function module tool software, art. no. 615014. Data rail, art. no. 6899.., data rail connector REG/4, art. no. 680602.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

light grey

676029

1/30 9.3

In KNX, to be completed with: Function module REG, art. no. 676029. — Note: The program FM Loader 32 is available over the Internet for operating systems Windows NT, 2000 and XP. Contents: Program diskettes with manual and copy-protected plug (dongle). ˜

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

615014

1/1 9.1

Info

Info

Interfaces/gateways • The devices have protection type IP 20 and can only be used indoors. Devices with a different type of protection are labelled separately.

USB interface, flush-mounted

KNX system devices

For connecting a programming or diagnostics device with a USB1.1 or USB2 interface to the KNX. For screw mounting in the size 60 installation box. With integrated bus coupler. The device is connected to the bus with a bus connecting terminal. Compatible with ETS 3.

K

Mounting depth: 20 mm To be completed with: Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. System M 2960.., 2979.., System Design 2978... — Contents: With bus connecting terminal. ˜

Version

Art. no. 681799

PU PG

Info

1/50 9

www.merten.com

˜

The function module tool software consists of: Graphic editor: Function block library with over 50 function elements, task images and compilers to create programs. Loader: For loading the programs into the function module. Documenter: For creating and printing out the documentation. PC requirements: min. 486 processor with min. 1 MB available space on the hard drive and a free serial interface.

©2010

| Interfaces/gateways | KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES

437


KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES

˜

Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE

INSTABUS radio gateway, flushmounted

For System M. For telephone socket-outlets TAE or TDO, combination socket-outlets RJ45/TAE or flush-mounted USB interface.

The radio gateway connects the KNX to radio switch sensors and radio actuators. Transmission is bi-directional. The gateway can be installed in a size 60 flushmounted box or a surface-mounted box.

To be completed with: Telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. 4652... Loudspeaker connection insert art. no. 4669.., 4670... USB interface, flush-mounted, art. no. 681799. Telephone socketoutlet TDO, art. no. 465930.

Version ˜

Art. no.

296044 296019 296025

297944 297919 297914 297960

5/150 5/150 5/150 5/150

1 1 1.1 1.1

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

Central plate for telephone socket-outlet TAE For System Design. For telephone socket-outlets TAE or TDO, combination socket-outlets RJ45/TAE or flush-mounted USB interface. ˜

To be completed with: Telephone socket-outlet TAE, art. no. 4652... Loudspeaker connection insert art. no. 4669.., 4670... USB interface, flush-mounted, art. no. 681799. Telephone socketoutlet TDO, art. no. 465930. Accessories: Labelling strips for switches, socket-outlets, art. no. 395019

Version ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

297844 297819 297860

1/150 1 1/150 1 1/150 1.2

297846

1/150 1.2

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white polar white aluminium ˜

KNX system devices

For connecting a programming or diagnostics device with a USB1.1 or USB2 interface to the KNX. For installation on DIN rails EN 50022. The bus is connected using a bus connecting terminal; a data rail is not necessary. With integrated bus coupler. Device width: 2 modules = approx. 36 mm Contents: With bus connecting terminal and cable cover. Art. no.

PU PG

681829

1/35 9.3

Info

www.merten.com

Version light grey

438

Art. no. 680999

USB interface REG-K

K

In KNX, to be completed with: Blanking cover, art. no. System M 6623.., 6621... Blanking cover, art. no. System Design 6622... Transmitter: Radio remote control Distance 5010, art. no. 590722. Radio push-button, 1-gang, art. no. System M MEG509103../5941.., System Design 5921... Radio push-button, 2-gang, art. no. System M MEG5092-03../5942.., System Design 5922... Universal radio transmitter, flush-mounted, 4-gang, art. no. 592599. Receiver: Plug adapter with radio receiver, art. no. 591019, 591519. Radio receiver, flush-mounted, 1-gang, art. no. 592591. – Technical Information — Note: Not compatible with Merten CONNECT radio system. Contents: With bus connecting terminal. ˜

Version

metallic

stainless steel

Supply voltage: Bus, DC 24 V, approx. 10 mA Channels: 25 (10 receiving blocks and 15 receiving/transmitting blocks) Operating elements: Function selector switch, channel selector switch, programming button Display elements: LED function displays, programming LED Radio frequency: 868 MHz Transmission capacity: max. 10 mW Range: up to 100 m (free field) up to 30 m (building) Dimensions: 50x44x33 mm (WxHxD) without antenna and retaining ring Type of protection: IP 20

5/150 1 5/150 1 5/150 1

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

PU PG

KNX software functions: From KNX to radio: Switching, toggling, dimming, blinds. From radio to KNX: Switching, toggling, dimming, blinds, edges.

KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES | Interfaces/gateways | ©2010

PU PG 1/50 9

Info


KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES KNX Internet controller IC1-V2 REG-K, merten@home

TeleController Plus REG-K The TeleController Plus REG-K connects the telephone network with conventional inputs/outputs and KNX. • Six switch outputs for conventional relays or surge switches. • Six connections, in order to show the current switching status of the surge switch. • Six signal inputs for break or make contacts. The TeleController can forward incoming signals to selected participants. • Up to 20 communication objects for KNX. To control devices or display the statuses. • Connection for an alarm acknowledgement key to reset active messages, for example. • Connection to functionally switch off the TeleController. This is controlled using a conventional DTMF telephone or a DTMF hand transmitter. Messages are conveyed by announcements, SMS, e-mail or fax to the selected participants. The corresponding texts can be changed with the handset. The device is operated with a rotary knob and is supported by display texts and announcements. The PC software provided enable convenient operation and configuration. With integrated bus coupler. For installation on DIN rails EN 60715. The bus is connected using screw terminals; a data rail is not necessary. Power supply: DC 12-24 V Power consumption: 90 mA at 24 V (open circuit), 790 mA at 24 V (max. load) Switch outputs: 6, 100 mA at 12 V/24 V Alarm outputs: 1, 100 mA at 12 V/24 V Signal inputs: 6, for floating make or break contacts Telephone: Analogue, CTR 21, line length 3 m KNX: Screw terminals RS 232: Cable length 3 m Device width: 8 modules = approx. 144 mm

Monitoring and control of systems and buildings via the Internet. The Internet connection is established using art. no. • 695190 via Ethernet (DSL-router) • 695191 via the integrated analogue modem (56 kBit/s) • 695192 via the integrated ISDN modem (64 k/ Bits/s) With LAN/Ethernet interface for networking up to 32 additional IC1 devices. The user interface "merten@home" is created using the IC1 configurator merten@home 2.0. With integrated bus coupler. For installation on DIN rails EN 60715. The bus is connected using a bus connecting terminal; a data rail is not necessary. Power consumption: approx. 5 W Power supply: DC 12-32 V KNX objects: 256 Interfaces: 1xRJ45 Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/s Art. no. 695191: 1xRJ45 analogue modem, 56 kBit/s Art. no. 695192: 1xRJ45 ISDN, 64 kBit/s Video channels: 8 (URL), max. image size depends on the camera used Video memory: max. 128 images with 320 x 240 pixel, JPG photo format History memory: 6 input channels, 128,000 data points/channel Year time switch: with 6 programs, DCF77 synchronised via Domoport Macros: max. 16 parallel macros, 32 programmable internal variables, logical, mathematical, comparative and chronological function modules. Device width: 6 TE = approx. 108 mm In KNX, to be completed with: Power supply REG, DC 24 V/0.4 A, art. no. 693003. Accessories: IC1 configurator merten@home 2.0. — Contents: User handbook on CD, log on data for Domoport, one 3 m cable each for network and telephone. ˜

Art. no.

PU PG

695190

1/4 9.3

695191 695192

1/4 9.3 1/4 9.3

Info

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

analogue, light grey

680790

1/6 9.3

Info

KNX system devices

Handset for TeleController

K

Speech output of the various messages can be monitored and changed with the handset.

˜

In KNX, to be completed with: TeleController Plus REG-K, art. no. 680790.

Version

Art. no.

PU PG

anthracite

660790

1/8 9.1

Info

www.merten.com

Version without modem, light grey analogue, light grey ISDN, light grey

Accessories: Handset, art. no. 660790. Power supply REG, DC 24 V/0.4 A, art. no. 693003. Power supply REG, DC 24 V/1.25 A, art. no. 693004. — ISDN and GSM version on request. Contents: PC software, connection cable RS 232. ˜

©2010

| Interfaces/gateways | KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES

439


KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES Teaching aids

Merten info DVD The Merten info DVD contains information and data on the products. Contents: • KNX product manual. The book provides detailed descriptions of KNX devices with electrical and mechanical data, as well as descriptions of the application programs and the parameters that can be configured. • Product databases (German/English) • Mini-function module tool software • PLANTEC tool software PTS • Panel programming software EIB TAB 2. • Programming software ETS tool for MT 701 V2.0 • Display tool software DTS • ETS tool for weather station • IC 1 Configuration Cloner, IP Changer • Tender documents (Ansi/Gaeb format) • Documentation on Merten products —

Language: German.

Version

Art. no.

PU

€/item PG

616002

1/1

9.9

Info

Merten CD The interactive CD gives comprehensive information on the subject of KNX. Uses typical situations in homes, offices and hotels to show how Merten KNX makes life and work easier, more flexible, more productive and more secure. The CD leads you through the Merten product spectrum, giving ideas for new function and demonstrating solutions. Checklists help you determine what components you need, so that system planning can be performed even more efficiently. —

Note: The CD can be ordered over the Internet at www.mymerten.com. Language: German. English.

KNX system devices

www.merten.com

K

440

KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES | Teaching aids | ©2010


KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES

KNX system devices

www.merten.com

K

©2010

| Teaching aids | KNX SYSTEM DEVICES/ACCESSORIES

441


KNX sensors

COMPREHENSIVE BUILDING MANAGEMENT

KNX system characteristics

KNX sensors

Equipped for the future with KNX: the data is recorded by sensors and sent via a twin-core bus device to the actuators to control their activity.

are the first step in every action. The wind speed must first be measured before a signal can be issued to lower the blinds when a limit value is exceeded. And the light can only be turned on when a movement has been registered â&#x20AC;&#x201C; and energy can only be regulated in an efficient manner when the temperature has been measured.

Sensors record information. This information can include room temperature, movements, or manually entered instructions, which are transmitted as data across the KNX bus system.

KNX sensors

www.merten.de

The actuators receive data that is then converted into actions, such as lowering or raising a blind, or dimming a light.

442

KNX sensors | Š2010


KNX sensors

Contents

Room temperature control unit with ARTEC Display, System Design

Now choosing and ordering KNX articles is even easier. You will quickly find the required components in the System devices, Sensors and Actuators sections.

KNX system devices starting on page 430 • Power supply units • Bus coupler • IP routers • Interfaces/gateways • Accessories

Room temperature control unit for the commercial sector M-SMART, System M

KNX sensors starting on page 442 • Push-button • Room temperature control unit • Binary inputs • Movement and presence detectors • Time switches • Devices for display and operation

KNX sensors

KNX actuators starting on page 482

www.merten.de

• Switch actuators • Blind actuators • Dimming actuators • Room temperature control unit • Devices for display and operation

Touch panel 7"

©2010

| KNX sensors

443


KNX SENSORS Technical Information: KNX system characteristics

Push-button, 2-gang plus

Push-buttons System M

For System M. With integrated bus coupling unit. Push-button with four operating buttons, operating and status display and labelling field. The operating display can also be used as an orientation light. The device is connected to the bus line with a bus connecting terminal.

KNX sensorsKNX sensorsKNX systemKNX sensorsL

• The devices have protection type IP 20 and can only be used indoors. Devices with a different type of protection are labelled separately.

KNX software functions: Switching, toggling, dimming (single/dual-surface), blind (single/dual-surface), pulse edges trigger 1-, 2-, 4- or 8-bit telegrams (distinction between short and long operation), pulse edges with 2-byte telegrams (distinction between short and long operation), 8-bit linear regulator, scene retrieval, scene saving, disable functions.

Push-button, 1-gang plus For System M. With integrated bus coupling unit. Push-button with 2 operating buttons, operating and status display and labelling field. The operating display can also be used as an orientation light. The device is connected to the bus line with a bus connecting terminal. KNX software functions: Switching, toggling, dimming (single/dual-surface), blind (single/dual-surface), pulse edges trigger 1-, 2-, 4- or 8-bit telegrams (distinction between short and long operation), pulse edges with 2-byte telegrams (distinction between short and long operation), 8-bit linear regulator, scene retrieval, scene saving, disable functions. Accessories: Labelling sheets for push-buttons, art. no. 618319/ 20. — Contents: With protective hood for plaster.With bus connecting terminal. ˜

Version ˜

617144 617119 617125

1/60 9 1/60 9 1/60 9

627544 627519 627514 627560

1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60

9 9 9 9

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

KNX sensors

www.merten.com

L

444

Info

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

KNX SENSORS | Push-buttons System M | ©2010

Accessories: Labelling sheets for push-buttons, art. no. 618319/ 20. — Contents: With protective hood for plaster.With bus connecting terminal. ˜

Version ˜

Info

617244 617219 617225

1/60 9 1/60 9 1/60 9

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

627644 627619 627614 627660

1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60

9 9 9 9

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant


KNX SENSORS Push-button 2-gang plus with room temperature control unit For System M. Convenient control unit with 4 operating buttons, operating and status display and labelling field. The operating display can also be used as an orientation light. With room temperature control unit and display. With 5 red LEDs. The room temperature control unit can be used for heating and cooling with infinitely adjustable KNX valve drives or to trigger switch actuators and heating actuators. With the white backlit display for showing e.g. the time, date, temperature and operating mode. Menu for setting default operating modes, setpoint value, working/nonworking day (external trigger), display mode, time, switching times and brightness of the display. The push-buttons are freely parameterisable as push-button pairs (dual-surface) or as single push-buttons. With integrated bus coupler. The bus is connected using a bus connecting terminal.. KNX software functions: Functions of the push-buttons: Switching, toggling, dimming, blind control (relative or absolute), pulse edges trigger 1-, 2-, 4- or 8-bit telegrams (distinction between short and long operation), pulse edges with 2-byte telegrams (distinction between short and long operation), 8-bit linear regulator, scene retrieval, scene saving, disable functions, timed control with synchronisation, notification functions, the cyclic reading of external temperature values, fan control, operating modes, move setpoints. Functions of the room temperature control unit: Controller type: 2-step control, continuous PI controller, switching PI controller (PWM) Output: continuous in the range 0 to 100% or switching ON/OFF Controller mode: • Heating with one controller output • Cooling with one controller output • Heating and cooling with separate controller outputs • Heating and cooling with one controller output • 2-step heating with 2 control outputs • 2-step cooling with 2 control outputs • 2-step heating and cooling with 4 control outputs Operating modes: Comfort, comfort extension, standby, night reduction, frost/heat protection Move all setpoints, save all setpoint temperatures and operating modes when reset, external temperature monitoring, additional output of the control value as 1 byte value on the PWM. Monitoring function for the actual temperature, valve protection function. Scene function. Operation: Menu.

Accessories: Labelling sheets for push-buttons, art. no. 618319/ 20. — Contents: With protective hood for plaster.With bus connecting terminal. ˜

Version ˜

Art. no.

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

PU PG

617444 617419 617425

1/60 9 1/60 9 1/60 9

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium

627844 627819 627814 627860

1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60

9 9 9 9

KNX sensors

L

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

KNX software functions: Switching, toggling, dimming (single/dual-surface), blind (single/dual-surface), pulse edges trigger 1-, 2-, 4- or 8-bit telegrams (distinction between short and long operation), pulse edges with 2-byte telegrams (distinction between short and long operation), 8-bit linear regulator, scene retrieval, scene saving, disable functions.

Note: If you already have the labelling software, you can download the form for the multi-function push-button at www.merten.com. Use to label conventional foils (max. thickness 0.1 mm). Contents: With bus connecting terminal and supporting plate. Screw for protection against dismantling.With protective hood for plaster.

Version ˜

For System M. With integrated bus coupling unit. Push-button with 8 operating buttons, operating and status display and labelling field. The operating display can also be used as an orientation light. The device is connected to the bus line with a bus connecting terminal.

MEG6212-0344 MEG6212-0319 MEG6212-0325

1/50 9 1/50 9 1/50 9

new new new

1/50 1/50 1/50 1/50

new new new new

www.merten.com

Push-button, 4-gang plus

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium

MEG6212-0444 MEG6212-0419 MEG6212-0414 MEG6212-0460

9 9 9 9

©2010

| Push-buttons System M | KNX SENSORS

445


KNX SENSORS Push-button, 4-gang plus with IR receiver

Push-button 4-gang plus with room temperature control unit

For System M. With integrated bus coupling unit. Push-button with 8 operating buttons, operating and status display and labelling field. The operating display can also be used as an orientation light. The functions of each of the keys can be triggered using an IR remote control. The push-button is pre-programmed for operation with a Merten IR remote control Distance. Many other IR remote controls (e.g. existing TV or CD player remote controls) can be taught into the push-buttons. The device is connected to the bus line with a bus connecting terminal.

For System M. Convenient control unit with 8 operating buttons, operating and status display and labelling field. The operating display can also be used as an orientation light. With room temperature control unit and display. With integrated piezoelectric buzzer to display alarm states and IR receiver. All functions of the respective buttons can be controlled via IR remote control. With 9 red LEDs. The room temperature control unit can be used for heating and cooling with infinitely adjustable KNX valve drives or to trigger switch actuators and heating actuators. With the white backlit display for showing e.g. the time, date, temperature and operating mode. Menu for setting default operating modes, setpoint value, working/nonworking day (external trigger), display mode, time, switching times and brightness of the display. The push-buttons are freely parameterisable as push-button pairs (dual-surface) or as single push-buttons. With integrated bus coupler. The bus is connected using a bus connecting terminal.. KNX software functions: Functions of the push-buttons: Switching, toggling, dimming, blind control (relative or absolute), pulse edges trigger 1-, 2-, 4- or 8-bit telegrams (distinction between short and long operation), pulse edges with 2-byte telegrams (distinction between short and long operation), 8-bit linear regulator, scene retrieval, scene saving, disable functions, timed control with synchronisation, notification functions, the cyclic reading of external temperature values, fan control, operating modes, move setpoints. Functions of the room temperature control unit: Controller type: 2-step control, continuous PI controller, switching PI controller (PWM) Output: continuous in the range 0 to 100% or switching ON/OFF Controller mode: • Heating with one controller output • Cooling with one controller output • Heating and cooling with separate controller outputs • Heating and cooling with one controller output • 2-step heating with 2 control outputs • 2-step cooling with 2 control outputs • 2-step heating and cooling with 4 control outputs Operating modes: Comfort, comfort extension, standby, night reduction, frost/heat protection Move all setpoints, save all setpoint temperatures and operating modes when reset, external temperature monitoring, additional output of the control value as 1 byte value on the PWM. Monitoring function for the actual temperature, valve protection function. Scene function. Operation: Menu. Contents: With bus connecting terminal and supporting plate. Screw for protection against dismantling.With protective hood for plaster.

KNX software functions: Switching, toggling, dimming (single/dual-surface), blind (single/dual-surface), pulse edges trigger 1-, 2-, 4- or 8-bit telegrams (distinction between short and long operation), pulse edges with 2-byte telegrams (distinction between short and long operation), 8-bit linear regulator, scene retrieval, scene saving, disable functions. Accessories: Labelling sheets for multi-function push-button with IR receiver, art. no. 618419/20. Transmitter: IR remote control Distance, art. no. 570222. CONNECT radio universal remote control art. no. 506923. — Contents: With protective hood for plaster.With bus connecting terminal. ˜

Version ˜

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

617544 617519 617525

1/60 9 1/60 9 1/60 9

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium

627944 627919 627914 627960

1/60 1/60 1/60 1/60

9 9 9 9

KNX sensors

L

Version ˜

www.merten.com

446

Info

MEG6214-0344 MEG6214-0319 MEG6214-0325

1/35 9 1/35 9 1/35 9

new new new

1/35 1/35 1/35 1/35

new new new new

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium

KNX SENSORS | Push-buttons System M | ©2010

PU PG

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

Art. no.

MEG6214-0444 MEG6214-0419 MEG6214-0414 MEG6214-0460

9 9 9 9


KNX SENSORS Protective hood for plaster

KNX push-button module, 1-gang

For System M. To protect push-buttons, rockers, room temperature control units and room controllers from contamination from painting and decorating work.

For System M. Push-button module without rocker. With programmable status display. The device is connected to the bus line with a bus connecting terminal. With integrated bus coupler.

Accessories from: Multi-function push-button, 2-gang with room temperature control unit, art. no. 6232.., 6273.. Rockers for pushbutton modules in System M design, art. no. 6191.., 6192.., 6193.., 6194.., 6195.., 6196.., 6197.., 6251.., 6252.., 6254.., 6255.., 6256.., 6257.., 6258... — Note: When the protective hood for plaster is in place, the temperature measurement of the room temperature control unit is restricted. ˜

Version

Art. no. 627591

PU PG

KNX software functions: The push-buttons can be parameterised either as a pair (dual-surface) or individually (single-surface). Single-surface: Switch ON or switch OFF, dimming, scenes. Dual-surface: Switch ON or switch OFF, dimming, scenes, blinds.

Info ˜

10/160 9

Labelling sheets for push-buttons For individual labelling of the System M push-buttons with text or symbols.

In KNX, to be completed with: Rocker for push-button module, 1gang, art. no. System M6191.., 6251... Rocker for push-button module, 1-gang, with 1/0 imprint, art. no. System M 6193.., 6254... Rocker for push-button module, 1-gang, with up/down arrow imprint, art. no. System M 6194.., 6255...

Version

Art. no. 625199

Version

Art. no. 618319 618320

PU PG

˜

Labelling sheets for multi-function push-button with IR receiver For individual labelling of the System M multifunction push-button with IR receiver.

To be completed with: System M push-button, 4-gang plus with IR receiver, art. no. 6175.., 6279... Accessories: Labelling software, art. no. 615022. — Contents: 1 sheet for every 28 products. ˜

Version

Art. no.

polar white silver

618419 618420

PU PG

For System M. The rocker is attached to the 1-gang push-button module.

Info

1/100 9 1/100 9

Info

1/100 9 1/100 9

Info

Rocker for 1-gang push-button module

To be completed with: System M push-button plus, 1-gang, 2-gang or 4-gang, art. no. 6171.., 6275.., 6172.., 6276.., 6174.., 6278... Accessories: Labelling software, art. no. 615022. — Contents: 1 sheet for every 28 products. ˜

polar white silver

PU PG 1/60 9

In KNX, to be completed with: KNX push-button module, 1-gang, art. no. System M 625199. Accessories: Protective hood for plaster, System M, art. no. 627591...

Version ˜

Art. no.

619144 619119 619125

1/150 9 1/150 9 1/150 9

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

PU PG

625144 625119 625114 625160

1/150 1/150 1/150 1/150

9 9 9 9

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

Labelling software For professional labelling of DIN A4 labelling sheets in System Basis, System M, System Design and OCTOCOLOR.

KNX sensors

L Art. no.

PU PG

615022

1/20 9.1

Info

www.merten.com

Version

©2010

| Push-buttons System M | KNX SENSORS

447


KNX SENSORS Rocker for 1-gang push-button module with 1/0 imprint

KNX push-button module, 2-gang For System M. Push-button module without rockers. With programmable status display. The device is connected to the bus line with a bus connecting terminal. With integrated bus coupler.

For System M. The rocker is attached to the 1-gang push-button module. ˜

In KNX, to be completed with: KNX push-button module, 1-gang, art. no. System M 625199. Accessories: Protective hood for plaster, System M, art. no. 627591...

Version ˜

Art. no.

619344 619319 619325

1/150 9 1/150 9 1/150 9

˜

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy ˜

PU PG

KNX software functions: The push-buttons can be parameterised either as a pair (dual-surface) or individually (single-surface). Single-surface: Switch ON or switch OFF, dimming, scenes. Dual-surface: Switch ON or switch OFF, dimming, scenes, blinds.

625444 625419 625414 625460

1/150 1/150 1/150 1/150

9 9 9 9

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

In KNX, to be completed with: Rockers for 2-gang push-button module, art. no. System M 6192.., 6252... Rockers for push-button module, 2-gang, with 1/0 and up/down arrow imprint, art. no. System M 6195.., 6256... Rockers for push-button module, 2-gang, with up/down arrow and 1/0 imprint, art. no. System M 6196.., 6257... Rockers for push-button module, 2-gang, with up/down arrow imprint, art. no. System M 6197.., 6258...

Version

Art. no. 625299

˜

Rockers for 2-gang push-button module

For System M. The rocker is attached to the 1-gang push-button module.

For System M. The rockers are attached to the 2-gang push-button module.

In KNX, to be completed with: KNX push-button module, 1-gang, art. no. System M 625199. Accessories: Protective hood for plaster, System M, art. no. 627591...

˜

PU PG

˜

Info

1/150 9 1/150 9 1/150 9

625544 625519 625514 625560

1/150 1/150 1/150 1/150

9 9 9 9

Duroplastic, highly scratch-resistant: With this article, use thermoplastic brilliant

˜

˜

KNX sensors

www.merten.com

L

KNX SENSORS | Push-buttons System M | ©2010

Art. no.

PU PG

Info

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy active white, glossy

619244 619219 619225

1/150 9 1/150 9 1/150 9

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

448

To be completed with: Push-button module, 2-gang, art. no. System M 568499. In KNX, to be completed with: KNX push-button module, 2-gang, art. no. System M 625299. Accessories: Protective hood for plaster, System M, art. no. 627591...

Version 619444 619419 619425

Thermoplastic classy matt

white polar white anthracite aluminium ˜

Art. no.

Thermoplastic brilliant

white, glossy polar white, glossy